Yamaha Electone EL-900 Owner - S Manual

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic prod- ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce
ucts may have either labels similar to the graphics shown products that are both user safe and environmentally
below or molded / stamped facsimiles of these graphics on friendly.
the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on We sincerely believe that our products and the production
this page. methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In
Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want
indicated in the safety instruction section. you to be aware of the following:
BATTERY NOTICE: This product MAY contain a small

nonrechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in
CAUTION place. The average life span of this type of battery is
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT OPEN approximately five years. When replacement becomes
necessary, contact a qualified service representative to
perform the replacement.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE WARNING: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as
regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.
However, you do have the option of having the servicer
See the name plate for graphic symbol markings.
dispose of these parts for you.
DISPOSAL NOTICE: Should this product become

damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is
considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state,
The exclamation point within the and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of
equilateral triangle is intended to alert products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.
the user to the present of important
operating and maintenance NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowledge
(servicing) instructions in the relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is
literature accompanying the product. operating as designed) are not covered by the
manufacture's warranty, and are therefore the owner's
responsibility.
Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer
The lightning flash with arrowhead before requesting service.
symbol within the equilateral triangle
is intended to alert the user to the NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the
presence of uninsulated "dangerous location of the name plate. The model number, serial
voltage" within the product's number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate.
enclosure that may be of sufficient You should record the model number, serial number, and
magnitude to constitute a risk of the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and
electrical shock. retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are

tested and approved by an independent safety testing
laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is
properly installed and used in its normal and customary
manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT
modify this unit or commission others to do so unless
specifically authorized by Yamaha.
Product performance and/or safety standards may be
diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may
be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties
may also be affected.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information Model

contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time
of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or Serial No.
modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation
to update existing units. Purchase Date
92-469-➀
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock,
short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required
have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet • Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
into any openings.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may
• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden have accumulated on it.
loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or
smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the
instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, • Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a
and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy finger or hand in the key cover gap.
objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, • Never insert or drop paper or metallic or other objects between the slits of
or roll anything over it. the key cover and the keyboard. If this happens, immediately turn off the
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always power and remove the electric plug from the outlet and have the instrument
hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple- • Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch
connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly
overheating in the outlet. result in the instrument overheating.
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be • Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or
used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.
the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all ■USING THE BENCH
components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the
volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-
volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.
level. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme possibility of accident or injury.
cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten
day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal them periodically using the included tool.
components.
■SAVING USER DATA
• Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions,
radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can affect • Always save data to a floppy disk frequently, in order to help prevent the loss
proper operation of the other products. of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error.
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or
fall over. modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,
solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Also, do
not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might
discolor the panel or keyboard.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do
not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
(1)B-5
Congratulations!
You are the proud owner of a fine electronic organ, Electone EL-900.
The Yamaha EL-900 Electone combines the most advanced AWM

tone generation technology with state-of-the-art digital electronics and
features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical enjoyment.
A large Liquid Crystal Display and sophisticated yet easy-to-use interface also greatly
enhance the operability of this advanced instrument.
In order to make the most of the Electone and extensive performance potential,
we urge you to read the manual thoroughly while trying out

the various features described.
Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference.
Included Items
Registration Menu Disk
3.5" 2HD Floppy Disk
Ownerﾕs Manual
Turning the Electone off erases all panel settings you have made. When the Electone is turned
on, Basic Registration 1 is automatically selected. If you have made panel settings you wish to
keep, save them to Registration Memory before turning the Electone off.
GM (General MIDI System Level 1) is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any
GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator,
regardless of maker. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support
the General MIDI standard.
XG is a new MIDI format created by Yamaha which significantly improves and expands upon the
General MIDI standard by providing a greater variety of high-quality voices plus considerably
enhanced effect operationﾑwhile being fully compatible with GM.
Products bearing the SONDIUS-XG logo are licensed under patents of Stanford University and Yamaha as
listed on the internet web site, <http://www.sondius-xg.com>.
･ The screen displays and illustrations as shown in this ownerﾕs manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.
･ Copying of the commercially available music sequence data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.
4
Table of Contents
1 Quick Introductory Guide
Panel Layout .............................................. 6 7 Music Disk Recorder ........................... 87

1 Precautions ......................................................... 87
Main Features ............................................ 9 2 Formatting a Disk ............................................... 89
1 Quick Introductory Guide .................. 1 0

1 Getting Started .................................................... 10
3
4
Recording ﾑ Punch In Recording ..................... 90
Recording Registrations (and Bulk Data) ........... 96 2 Voice Sections
5 Recalling Recorded Registrations (and Bulk Data) .... 97

2 Basic Registrations .............................................. 11 6 Replacing Registrations ...................................... 97
3 Registration Menu Disk ...................................... 12 7 Playback ﾑ About XG Songs ............................. 98
3
4 Basic Operation ................................................... 19 8 Other Functions ............................................... 102 Flute Voices
5 Using the LCD Display ....................................... 20 (Organ Sounds)
6 Voice List ............................................................ 24 8 Voice Edit ........................................... 110
1 Editing a Voice .................................................. 110
2 Voice Sections ..................................... 2 6 2 Saving Your New Voice .................................... 115
1 Selecting Voices from the Panel ......................... 26
4
3 Quitting Voice Edit ........................................... 117 Voice Controls
2 Selecting Voices from the Dotted Buttons .......... 30 4 Recalling an Edited Voice ................................. 117 and Effects
3 Voice Menus ....................................................... 32 5 Selecting Voices from a Voice Disk (Optional) .... 118
6 Voice Editing Basics .......................................... 119
3 Flute Voices (Organ Sounds) ............. 4 0
1 Creating Flute Voices ......................................... 40 9 Rhythm Pattern Program and
2 Save to User Flute Voice ..................................... 42
3 Using Preset and User Voices ............................. 43
Rhythm Sequence Program .............. 125
Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation . 125
5 Rhythm and
Accompaniment
1 Rhythm Pattern Program .................................. 126

4 Voice Controls and Effects ................. 44 1) Entering Rhythm Pattern Program ............. 126
1 Selecting from Voice Condition Pages ............... 45 2) Percussion Sounds Used for
[PAGE 1] ............................................................ 37
1) Touch Tone ................................................... 45
Rhythm Pattern Program ............................ 128
3) Step Write and Real Time Write ................. 130 6 Registration Memory
2) Pitch ............................................................... 46 4) Selecting Step Write or

Real Time Write Operation ......................... 130
3) Feet ................................................................ 46
5) Setting the Beat/Quantize Values ................ 130
4) Pan ................................................................. 46
6) Entering Percussion Sounds to
5) Reverb ............................................................ 46
6) Volume .......................................................... 46
a Rhythm Pattern ........................................ 131
7) Editing with Step Write ............................... 132
7 Music Disk Recorder
[PAGE 2] ............................................................ 46 8) Editing with Real Time Write ..................... 136

1) Effect (On/Off) .............................................. 46 9) Selecting Accompaniment Patterns ﾑ
2) Brilliance ........................................................ 47 Lower Rhythmic .......................................... 137
8
[PAGE 3] ............................................................ 47 10) Saving Rhythm Patterns ............................. 140
Voice Edit
1) Vibrato ........................................................... 47 11) Quitting Rhythm Pattern Program ............ 141
2) Touch Vibrato ............................................... 48 12) Recalling User Rhythm Patterns ................ 142
3) Slide (Lead Voice Only) ................................ 48 13) Selecting Patterns from a Pattern Disk
(Optional) .................................................. 143
4) Tune (Lead Voice Only) ................................ 48 Rhythm Pattern
2 Rhythm Sequence Program .............................. 144
2 Selecting from Effect Set Pages ........................... 48
1) Tremolo/Chorus ............................................ 49
1) Selecting a Sequence .................................... 144
2) Programming a Sequence ............................ 145
9 Program and
Rhythm Sequence
Program
2) Symphonic/Celeste ........................................ 49
3) Quitting Rhythm Sequence Program .......... 148
3) Delay .............................................................. 49
4) Playing Rhythm Sequences ......................... 148
4) Flanger ........................................................... 50
5) Playing All Sequences in Order ................... 149
5) Distortion ...................................................... 51
3 Selecting from the Panel ..................................... 52 1 0 Footswitches, Knee Lever and 10 Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
1) Reverb .................................................................. 52 Expression Pedals ........................... 151
2) Sustain .................................................................. 55 1 Footswitch ........................................................ 151
3) Tremolo/Chorus .................................................. 56 2 Knee Lever ........................................................ 153
5 Rhythm and Accompaniment ............ 5 9

1 Selecting Rhythms from the Panel ..................... 59
3 Expression Pedals ............................................. 155
11 Transpose And Pitch Controls ....... 157

11 Transpose and
Pitch Controls
2 Rhythm Condition Page ..................................... 62

3 Dotted Buttons and User Rhythms ..................... 64 12 MIDI ................................................ 158
4 Rhythm Menus ................................................... 66
5 Automatic Accompaniment-Auto Bass Chord
(A.B.C.) ............................................................... 68
13 Accessory Jacks and Controls ........ 160 12 MIDI
6 Accompaniment Controls .................................. 70 14 Appendix ......................................... 161

7 Preset/User Keyboard Percussion ....................... 71 MIDI ...................................................................... 161
8 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) ............................... 79 MIDI Data Format ................................................. 167
6 Registration Memory ......................... 8 0

MIDI Implementation Chart ................................. 178
Troubleshooting .................................................... 181
13 Accessory Jacks
and Controls
1 Storing Registrations ........................................... 80 Specifications ......................................................... 184

2 Selecting Registrations ........................................ 80 Index ...................................................................... 186
3 Saving the Registration Data to Disk .................. 81
4 Registration Shift ................................................ 82
14 Appendix
5
Panel Layout
Front Panel
LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1, 2 UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1, 2

(page 26) (page 26)
Monitor Speaker
REVERB UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE VOLUME UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 2 BRILLIANCE VOLUME
MAX BRILLIANT MAX BRILLIANT MAX
STRINGS BRASS CLARI- SAXO- CHORUS HARMO- 1 STRINGS BRASS CLARI- SAXO- CHORUS HARMO- 1
NET PHONE NICA NET PHONE NICA
REVERB
(page 52) ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI 2 ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI 2
PHONE PHONE
MIN MELLOW MIN MELLOW MIN
SUSTAIN LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE VOLUME LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 2 BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT MAX BRILLIANT MAX
UPPER STRINGS BRASS CLARI- SAXO- CHORUS HORN STRINGS BRASS CLARI- SAXO- CHORUS HORN
(KNEE) 1 1
NET PHONE NET PHONE
SUSTAIN
(page 55) LOWER
(KNEE)
PEDAL ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI 2 ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI 2
PHONE PHONE
MELLOW MIN MELLOW MIN
KEYBOARD BASIC
PERCUSSION RHYTHM VOLUME REGIST.
MAX
LOWER SEQ. SEQ. MARCH WALTZ SWING BOUNCE SLOW
1 1
1 2 ROCK
USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 USER 4 A B
1
PEDAL SEQ. SEQ. TANGO LATIN 1 LATIN 2 8 BEAT 16 BEAT 2 2

3 4
USER 5 USER 6 USER 7 USER 8 C D
2
MIN
3
TEMPO
4
BAR/BEAT
Rhythm Section
5
(page 59) TEMPO
INTRO. SYNCHRO START

ENDING START
FILL IN
KEYBOARD PERCUSSION BASIC REGIST.

(page 71) (page 11)
M.
/TO DISK
13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4
M./TO DISK Button Registration Memory Buttons

(page 80) (page 62)
6
LCD Display DISPLAY SELECT LEAD VOICE 1, 2
(page 20) (page 8) (page 26)
LEAD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE VOLUME LEAD VOICE 2 BRILLIANCE VOLUME

Monitor Speaker
VOICE EFFECT A. B. C. BRILLIANT MAX BRILLIANT MAX
DISPLAY SET M. O. C.
PAGE VIOLIN FLUTE 1 VA VA 1
ACOUS- VIRTUAL
TIC
FOOT REGIST. EXP. OBOE TRUM- TO VA VA SOLO

SW. SHIFT PITCH/MIDI PET LOWER ELEC- CUSTOM (KNEE)
TRONIC
RHYTHM
PEDAL VOICE 1, 2
CONTRAST VOICE
EDIT
PROGRAM
PATTERNSEQUENCE
PEDAL VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE VOLUME PEDAL VOICE 2 BRILLIANCE VOLUME
(page 26)
CONTRA ELEC. CONTRA ELEC.
BASS BASS 1 BASS BASS 1
U. FLUTE L. FLUTE TREMOLO

VOICE VOICE (FAST)
COARSE HOLD ORGAN

BASS
TUBA TO
LOWER
ORGAN
BASS
TUBA TO
LOWER MASTER VOLUME
MELLOW MIN MELLOW MIN (page 11)
DATA CONTROL DISPLAY SELECT MASTER VOLUME
POWER
(page 10)
POWER
RECORD PLAY
UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
SONG
REPEAT
FROM TO
SONG COPY
SONG DEL. MUSIC DISK
RECORDER
PAUSE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD CUSTOM PLAY (page 87)
– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
Floppy Disk Slot
LED (Lamp in-use) Eject Button
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D.
D. (Disable) Button
(page 80)
7
LCD/Display Select
LCD Display (page 20) Page Buttons (page 28)
VOICE DISPLAY Button (page 28)
VOICE
DISPLAY
EFFECT
SET
A. B. C.
M. O. C.
EFFECT SET Button (page 48)
PAGE
A. B. C. /M. O. C. Button (page 69)
FOOT SW. Button (page 151)
FOOT
SW.
REGIST. EXP.
SHIFT PITCH/MIDI
REGIST SHIFT Button (page 82)
EXP./PITCH/MIDI Button (page 155)
VOICE EDIT Button (page 110)
RHYTHM
CONTRAST
VOICE
EDIT
PROGRAM
PATTERN SEQUENCE
RHYTHM PATTERN PROGRAM Button (page 126)
RHYTHM SEQUENCE Button (page 144)

VOICE VOICE (FAST)
COARSE HOLD
TREMOLO (FAST) Button (page 58)

DATA CONTROL DISPLAY SELECT
L. FLUTE VOICE Button (page 40)
DATA CONTROL Buttons (page 21) U. FLUTE VOICE Button (page 40)
HOLD Button (page 23)
COARSE Button (page 23)

Contrast Dial (page 23)
Others
Keyboard Cover/Music Stand
Monitor Speakers
Front Panel (page 6)
Upper Keyboard
Lower Keyboard
MIDI Jacks (page 160)
Knee Lever (page 153)
Jacks (page 180) Right-Footswitch (page 82)

Left-Footswitch (page 151)
Speaker Unit
Expression Pedal (page 11)
Second Expression Pedal (page155)
Pedalboard
8
Main Features
Your Yamaha Electone is packed with many sophisticated functions. Yet is amazingly easy to
use. The main features are briefly described here so that you can quickly understand the
capabilities of your Electone.
Included among the main features are:
1 Astoundingly True-to-life Sounds

The new AWM (Advanced Wave Memory), FM (Frequency Modulation) and VA (Virtual Acoustic
Synthesis) tone generation technologies combined with authentic touch response, completed by
adding breathtaking ﾒHorizontal-touch feature,ﾓ for individual instrument voices, make this Electone
a truly expressive musical instrument.
You can enjoy playing a total of 207 voices (173 AWM/FM voices and 34 VA voices) using the touch
response and solo mode functions. (page 26)
2 Limitless Variety of Organ Sounds

The Electone also has separate voice sections that feature classic organ sounds-from jazz and pop to
church and theater-and lets you easily create your own organ sounds by adjusting the volumes of
the various flute footages. (page 40)
3 Original Voice Creation

The Electone also provides easy-to-use voice editing tools for manipulating the sophisticated AWM
and FM tone generation technologies, allowing you to create your own original Electone voices
(except for VA voices). (page 110)
4 Dynamic and Programmable Rhythm Patterns

The Rhythm section of the Electone features authentic drum and percussion sounds, used by expert
rhythm programmers in creating a total of 66 rhythm patterns, ranging across all styles of music.
(page 59)
Along with the Keyboard Percussion function (page 71), which lets you play 120 different percussion
sounds from the keyboard, the Rhythm Pattern Program and Rhythm Sequence Program functions
let you record your own rhythm patterns and connect them to make songs. (page 125)
5 Wide Variety of Effects

Electone voices can also be enhanced with a full range of high-quality digital effects, ranging from
Tremolo and Reverb to Flanger, Delay and Distortion. Pan and Reverb can be applied to each voice
and each percussion sound independently. (page 44)
6 Versatile Functions of the Music Disk Recorder

The Electone also features a Music Disk Recorder (MDR) for recording your registrations and
performances to a floppy disk. In addition, the MDR allows you to copy a song from a disk to
another, duplicate a disk, and play and save commercially available XG song data. (page 87)
7 Large LCD for Systematic, Intuitive Operation

The large (480 x 160 full dot) LCD display provides comprehensive and easy-to-understand control
over virtually all of the operations of the Electone.
9
1 Quick Introductory Guide
1
Whether you are an advanced Electone performer or have never touched an electronic keyboard in your life,
Quick Introductory Guide
we recommend that you take the time to go through this basic section. It shows you in the simplest possible
manner how to start playing your Electone. The basic operations and functions that you learn in this section
will also be important when you later use the Electoneﾕs more advanced features.
1 Getting Started
1 Plug the power cord in to an appropriate electrical outlet.
Only use the voltage specified as correct
2
for the Electone. The required voltage is
Turn on the Electone by pressing the POWER switch.
printed on the name plate of the Electone.
Yamaha products are manufactured
specifically for the supply voltage in the
area where they are to be sold. If you
should move, or if any doubt exists about
the supply voltage, please consult with a POWER
qualified technician.
When you turn on the Electone, the following displays will appear
one after the other on the LCD display:
This last display shows the currently assigned voice settings for each
voice section, as well as the overall balance between the Upper and
Lower voices.
When the Electone is turned on, Basic Registration 1 is automatically

selected.
10
1
3 Set the MASTER VOLUME control.
The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall control which affects

the volume of the entire instrument.
MASTER VOLUME
4 Press the Expression pedal down with your foot.

Once you have set the MASTER VOLUME control to a suitable level,
you can use the Expression pedal to change the volume with your
foot as you play.
Maximum volume Minimum volume
BASIC
REGIST.
2 Basic Registrations
1
The Basic Registration section has five factory preset registrations, each 2
with a different set of voices for the Upper/Lower keyboards and

Pedalboard and each specially suited for playing in a different music 3
style.
4
To select Basic Registrations:
When you turn the power on, the Electone automatically selects Basic
5
Registration 1. Press the BASIC REGIST. buttons to select each Basic
Registration.
The chart below lists the voices that have been set for the Upper/Lower
keyboards and Pedalboard in each of the five Basic Registrations.
Basic Basic Basic Basic Basic

Registration 1 Registration 2 Registration 3 Registration 4 Registration 5
Upper Keyboard
Strings 1 Brass 1 Flute 1 Cosmic 1 Synth. Brass 1
Voice 1
Turning the Electone off erases all panel
Lower Keyboard
Strings 1 Horn1 Piano 1 Cosmic 2 Cosmic 3 settings you have made. When the
Voice 1
Electone is turned on, Basic Registration
Pedal Voice 1 Contra Bass1 Tuba Contra Bass 1 Cosmic 2 Synth. Bass 1
1 is automatically selected.
If you have made panel settings you wish to keep, save them to Registration
Memory (page 80) before turning the Electone off. You can, however,
restore the panel settings that were made before the Electone was last
turned off. See page 86 for more information.
11
1
3 Registration Menu Disk
The Electone includes convenient Registrations that let you completely

and instantly change the voices and other settings for all of the keyboards,
even as you play. Each registration is pre-programmed to be used for a
specific music style or instrumental combination.
Included with your Electone is a Registration Menu Disk. The disk is
packed with 80 different types of registrations, including voice and rhythm
selections. Each registration is pre-programmed to be used for a specific
music style or instrumental combination.
NOTE:
To select registrations from the Registration Menu Disk:
See page 87 for more information on the
1
Music Disk Recorder. Put the included Registration Menu Disk (with the label of the disk
facing upward and the sliding shutter facing forward) into the Disk
NOTE: slot, located just under the Music Disk Recorder at the right side of
the Electone.
See page 14 for the complete list of the
Registration Menus. Once youﾕve securely inserted the disk into the slot, the LCD Display
on the panel will automatically change to show the available
Registration Menus.
NOTE:
There are dozens of registrations on a disk, but up to 16 can only be
While you are in the Voice Edit mode or shown in the LCD Display at a time.
Rhythm Pattern/Sequence Program mode, The page numbers 1 through 5 shown at the top right corner of the
the Registration Menus cannot be
displayed on the LCD.
LCD indicate this Registration Menu Disk contains five pages.
2
Press the Page button to select the various menu ﾒpagesﾓ of
registrations available on the disk.
PAGE
When the page numbers are displayed at the top right corner,
you can select the pages by pressing the Page buttons, [s] to
select next page and [w] to select previous page.
12
1
3
Select one of the registrations shown on the LCD by pressing the
appropriate Data Control button.

Up to 16 registration selections are shown on the LCD, and the 16
Data Control buttons correspond to those selections.
The Data Control buttons are used to select voices, rhythms and
various functions. They are also used to raise or lower volumes
and levels, as well as move the cursor up and down, right and
left.
NOTE:
Inadvertently pressing another button on

the panel may change the content of the
LCD during the Registration Menu
operation. In this case press PLAY button
on the Music Disk Recorder section, to
retrieve the Registration Menu display.
13
1 Registration Menu List
Page 1: Strings
Orchestra1 1 Strings 1 2 Strings 2 Violin 4 4
5 Horn 3 6 Strings 1 7 Contrabass 1 8
Orchestra2 1 Horn 3 2 Horn 1 4
5 Tremolo Strings 6 Strings 2 7 Contrabass 1 8
Orchestra3 1 2 English Horn 4
5 Strings 2 6 7 8 Contrabass 1
Orchestra4 1 Strings 1 2 Brass 1 Piccolo 4
5 Strings 1 6 Brass 2 7 Timpani 8
Orch.Pops1 1 Strings 2 2 Chorus 2 Whistle 4 Slow Rock 2
5 Strings 2 6 Chorus 2 7 Upright Bass 8
Orch.Pops2 1 Cosmic 1 2 Celesta 4 Slow Rock 1
5 Strings 2 6 Chorus 2 7 Upright Bass 8
Orch.Pops3 1 Strings 2 2 Harpsichord Violin 4 4 8 Beat 1
5 Strings 1 6 Horn 3 7 Elec. Bass 1 8
Musical 1 Tutti 1 2 Strings 2 Piccolo 4 Polka 1
5 Horn 1 6 Strings 1 7 Contrabass 1 8
Strs.Ens.1 1 Strings 3 2 Strings 2 Violin 4 4
5 Strings 3 6 Strings 2 7 Contrabass 1 8
Strs.Ens.2 1 Strings 2 2 Synth. Strings 1 4
5 Strings 2 6 7 Contrabass 1 8
Strs.Ens.3 1 Strings 1 2 Strings 2 Strings 5 4
Strs.Ens.4 1 Strings 2 2 Strings 2 (16') 4
Solo Vln. 1 Violin 4 2 Violin 1 4
Strs.Quart 1 Violin 1 2 4
5 Violin 3 6 7 Cello 8
Pizz.Strs. 1 Pizzicato Strings 2 4
5 Pizzicato Strings 6 Pizzicato Strings 7 Pizzicato Strings 8
Pizz.Ens. 1 Pizzicato Strings 2 Pizzicato Strings (16') 4
5 Pizzicato Strings 6 Pizzicato Strings 7 Pizzicato Strings 8
The numbers in the parentheses indicate that the “feet” settings for the assigned voice are different from the default.
1 :UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 2 :UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 2 :LEAD VOICE 1 4 :RHYTHM

5 :LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 6 :LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 2 7 :PEDAL VOICE 1 8 :PEDAL VOICE 2
14
1

Page 2: Brass
Marching Band 1 1 Brass 1 (16') 2 Brass 1 (8') 4 March 1
5 Brass 1 6 7 Tuba 8
Marching Band 2 1 Glockenspiel 2 Piccolo 4 March 2
BigBand1 1 Tutti 3 2 Trumpet 1 4 Swing 3
5 Trombone 2 6 7 Upright Bass 8
BigBand2 1 Tutti 3 2 Trumpet 3 4 Swing 2
5 Guitar 2 6 7 Upright Bass 8
BigBand3 1 Trombone 2 2 Trombone 2 4 Swing 3
5 Sax Ensemble 1 6 7 Upright Bass 8
BigBand4 1 Muted Trombone 2 Muted Trombone 4 Swing 2
5 Piano 1 6 7 Upright Bass 8
BigBand5 1 Saxphone 2 2 Saxphone 2 4 Swing 1
5 Brass 4 6 7 Upright Bass 8
BigBand6 1 Sax Ensemble 1 2 Sax Ensemble 1 4 Swing 1
5 Muted Trombone 6 7 Upright Bass 8
Fanfare 1 Brass 2 2 Trumpet 1 4
Horn.Ens. 1 Horn 3 2 4
5 Trombone 1 6 7 Tuba 8
Afrocuban 1 2 Trumpet 3 4 Swing 6
JazzBallad 1 2 Flugelhorn 4 Jazz Ballad
Dixie1 1 Clarinet 2 2 4 Dixieland 2
5 Banjo 6 7 Upright Bass 8
Dixie2 1 2 Trombone 1 4 Dixieland 1
5 Honky Tonk Piano 6 7 Upright Bass 8
SaxFusion1 1 2 Saxphone 2 4 16 Beat 3
5 Elec. Piano 2 6 7 Elec. Bass 1 8
SaxFusion2 1 2 Saxphone 2 (8') 4 Bounce 3
5 Synth. Strings 2 6 Elec. Piano 1 7 Elec. Bass 2 8

15
1
Page 3: Lead
Wood.Ens. 1 Clarinet 1 2 Flute 1 4
5 Bassoon 2 6 7 Contrabass 1 8
Menuet 1 2 Flute 1 4
5 Harp 6 7 Contrabass 1 8
Swan 1 2 Oboe 1 4
5 Tremolo Strings 6 7 Contrabass 2 8
PolkaEns.1 1 2 Clarinet 1 4 Polka 1
5 Horn 3 6 7 Pizzicato Bass 8
PolkaEns.2 1 2 Glockenspiel Piccolo 4 Polka 1
5 English Horn 6 7 Pizzicato Bass 8
Pops1 1 2 Flute 2 4 Slow Rock 1
Pops2 1 2 Oboe 2 4 8 Beat 5
5 Pizzicato Strings 6 7 Pizzicato Bass 8
Pops3 1 2 Whistle 4 8 Beat 1
Jazz.Cla. 1 2 Clarinet 2 4 Jazz Ballad
5 Strings 2 6 7 Upright Bass 8
Folklore 1 2 Pan Flute 4 Country 2
5 Guitar 1 6 7 Pizzicato Bass 8
Folk.Harm. 1 2 Harmonica 1 4
BluesHarp 1 2 Harmonica 2 4 Slow Rock 3
Tango 1 Harmonica 2 2 Bandoneon (4') Violin 1 4 Tango 2
5 Piano 1 6 Strings 2 7 Pizzicato Bass 8
Chanson 1 Accordion 2 Harmonica 2 4 Waltz 1
5 Accordion 6 7 Pizzicato Bass 8
Jazz.Org.1 1 Jazz Organ 2 2 Jazz Organ 2 (4') 4 Bossanova 2
5 Pop Organ 1 6 7 Organ Bass 1 8
Jazz.Org.2 1 Pop Organ 2 2 Jazz Organ 1 Jazz Organ 3 4 Swing 2
5 Pop Organ 1 6 7 Organ Bass 1 8

16
1

Page 4: Decay
Piano1 1 Piano 1 2 4
5 Piano 1 6 7 Pizzicato Bass 8
Piano2 1 Piano 2 2 4 8 Beat 5
5 Piano 2 6 Strings 2 7 Elec. Bass 1 8
E.Piano1 1 Elec. Piano 1 2 4 16 Beat 3
E.Piano2 1 Elec. Piano 2 2 4 8 Beat 1
HonkyTonk 1 Honky Tonk Piano 2 4 Dixieland 1
5 Honky Tonk Piano 6 7 Upright Bass 8
Country 1 2 Whistle 4 Country 1
BossaGuit. 1 2 Guitar 2 4 Bossanova 1
5 Elec. Piano 1 6 Strings 2 7 Upright Bass 8
SambaGuit. 1 Guitar 3 2 4 Samba 2
Samba 1 Marimba 2 4Samba 1
Canzone 1 Mandolin 2 Chorus 3 Violin 3 4 Tango 1
5 Strings 4 6 7 Pizzicato Bass 8
Reggae 1 Steel Drum 2 4 Reggae 2
5 Pop Organ 1 6 7 Elec. Bass 1 8
Japan 1 2 Shakuhachi 4
5 Koto 6 7 Koto 8
MusicBox 1 Music Box 2 Whistle 4 Slow Rock 1
5 Chorus 2 6 Strings 2 7 Pizzicato Bass 8
X'masChime 1 Synth. Chime 2 Chime Glockenspiel 4 Polka 1
5 Theatre Organ 1 6 Chorus 2 7 Organ Bass 2 8
Oldies 1 Elec. Guitar 2 2 4 8 Beat 3
5 Elec. Guitar 1 6 7 Elec. Bass 3 8
HeavyMetal 1 Distorted Guitar 2 Distorted Guitar 4 Bounce 3

17
1
Page 5: Synth
Fusion1 1 2 Soprano Sax 4 8 Beat 4
Fusion2 1 Elec. Guitar 1 2 Elec. Guitar 2 4 16 Beat Funk 1
5 Elec. Piano 1 6 Strings 2 7 Elec. Bass 2 8
Dance1 1 Synth. Brass 2 2 Synth. Brass 2 4 Dance Pop 2
Dance2 1 Brass 3 2 Brass 3 (16') Trumpet 4 4 Dance Pop 4
Dance3 1 Cosmic 3 2 Cosmic 4 4 8 Beat 2
5 Elec. Guitar 1 6 Synth. Strings 1 7 Elec. Bass 3 8
Dance4 1 Synth. Brass 1 2 Synth. Brass 2 Synth. Brass 1 4 Dance Pop 3
5 Cosmic 3 6 Elec. Guitar 1 7 Elec. Bass 2 8
Dance5 1 Glockenspiel 2 Synth. Brass 1 (16') Synth. Bass 3 4 Dance Pop 1
5 Piano 2 6 Synth. Strings 1 7 Elec. Bass 2 8
Funk 1 2 Brass 2 Trumpet 3 4 16 Beat 4
Pops1 1 Synth. Brass 1 2 Glockenspiel Recorder 4 8 Beat 4
5 Elec. Piano 1 6 Synth. Strings 2 7 Elec. Bass 1 8
Pops2 1 2 Whistle 4 8 Beat 5
5 Piano 2 6 7 Elec. Bass 1 8
JazzySax. 1 2 Saxphone 2 4 8 Beat 5
5 Piano 2 6 7 Elec. Bass 1 8
Jazz.Waltz 1 2 Flugelhorn 4 Jazz Waltz 2
5 Elec. Piano 1 6 Cosmic 4 7 Elec. Bass 1 8
Orch.Syn.1 1 Tutti 4 2 Brass 2 Synth. Brass 2 4 Bounce 3
5 Clavi (8') 6 Synth. Clarinet 1 7 Synth. Bass 3 8
Orch.Syn.2 1 Brass 3 2 Synth. Brass 1 Trumpet 4 4 16 Beat 3
1 Elec. Piano 1 6 Cosmic 3 7 Elec. Bass 3 8
Cosmic1 1 Cosmic 7 2 Cosmic 1 Whistle (4') 4
5 Cosmic 5 6 Cosmic 1 7 Cotrabass 2 8
Cosmic2 1 Cosmic 6 2 Cosmic 3 (4') Marimba 4
5 Cosmic 9 6 Chorus 2 7 Cotrabass 2 8

18
1
4 Basic Operation

Registration Set-up
Select the keyboard

to play
Select the voice Select the rhythm

(Voice Menu) (Rhythm Menu)
Voice Edit Finely adjust the voice Finely adjust the rhythm Rhythm Program
(User Voice) (Voice Condition) (Rhythm Condition) (User Rhythm
/Rhythm Sequence)
* The Controls and Effects may

be applied differently depending
on the selected type of Controls Add effects
and Effects. See page 44 for
more information. (Effect Set)
Add reverb
Adjust the total volume Loading the Saving the

Setting Registration registration data registration data
(Master Volume)
Shift/Footswitch
/Knee Lever
Playing Electone Recording the performance
Expression Pedal
Music Disk Recorder
Playing back
19
1
5 Using the LCD Display
This section introduces you the convenient control functions of the LCD
display. The LCD display lets you see at a glance the current settings
and provides easy-to-understand graphic representation of all parameters.
Selecting a voice/rhythm
1
Press the panel voice/rhythm button which you want to use (For
example, press the STRINGS button in the Upper Keyboard Voice 1
section).
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT MAX
STRINGS BRASS CLARI- SAXO- CHORUS HARMO- 1
NET PHONE NICA
ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI 2

PHONE
MELLOW MIN
The following display will appear, showing all the available voices/
rhythms in the category (Strings Category in this case).
2
Press the Data Control button corresponding to the voice you want
to play (Strings 3 in this case).
The selected voice/rhythm will be shown in the reversed box.
20
1
Using Data Control Buttons

1
2 3 4 2
The Data Control buttons are used to select 1 a voice/rhythm or
function shown on the display.
Press the STRINGS button in the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 section
once again.
This LCD changes to show some of the other ways in which the Data
Control buttons are used to control Electone functions.
Each pair of buttons corresponding to the section of the display directly
above it increases/decreases 2 the value or chooses 3 a setting/
function. When you are setting the Pan position, each of them moves
the cursor 4 to the right/left.
Using Page Buttons

PAGE
These buttons are used to select (when available) the various ﾒpagesﾓ
of the display, the names of which appear at the top right of the LCD.
Use Page [s] to select the next page, and Page [w] to select the
previous page.
21
1
The Summary of the LCD Operation
1. To call up the LCD display

1) Pressing Panel Buttons 2) Pressing a Display Select button
● Selecting voices or setting up the Voice Condition ● Displaying Voice Display (Manual Balance)
● Selecting rhythms or setting up the Rhythm ● Setting effects
Condition ● Setting A.B.C./M.O.C.
● Setting the Reverb effect ● Setting the Left-Footswitch
● Setting the Sustain ● Setting Registration Shift (Right-Footswitch)
● Setting the User Keyboard Percussion ● Setting the 2nd Expression Pedal
● Setting Pitch and Transpose
● Setting MIDI
● Entering Voice Edit
● Entering Rhythm Pattern Program
● Entering Rhythm Sequence Program
● Selecting Flute voices or setting Flute Voices
● Selecting and setting Tremolo/Chorus
LCD display
2. To Select Pages
Selecting the page you want to
use with the Page buttons
3. To Actually Change the Settings

Using the Data Control buttons to:
● Select voices/rhythms/effects
● Turn on/off the Accompaniment and A.B.C. Memory
● Adjust Touch Tone and Reverb depth
● Edit the rhythm pattern/sequence
● Move the pan position and cursor position
22
LCD Display Page Buttons Display Select Buttons
1

VOICE EFFECT A. B. C.
PAGE
FOOT REGIST. EXP.

SW. SHIFT PITCH/MIDI
RHYTHM
CONTRAST VOICE PROGRAM
EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE

VOICE VOICE (FAST)
COARSE HOLD
DATA CONTROL DISPLAY SELECT
Data Control Buttons

Contrast Dial
Coarse Button Hold Button
Hold
This button allows you to keep the LCD display at the current function.
Normally, if the buttons of other functions are pressed, the LCD will
switch to those functions. To keep this from happening, press the Hold
button; the buttonﾕs LED will remain lit as long as Hold is in effect. Press
the button again to cancel Hold.
HOLD
Coarse Button
This button allows you to make quick ﾒjumpsﾓ when changing values (of
the parameters with bar indications). While holding the Coarse button
down, press the Data Control button corresponding to the value you
wish to change; the values will change rapidly toward the maximum or
minimum.
COARSE
Contrast Dial
The Contrast Dial at the right side of the LCD display can be used for
adjusting the relative sharpness of the characters displayed on the LCD.
CONTRAST
23
1
6 Voice List
A variety of voices can be divided into the following categories.
ORCHESTRAL The voice names in a square indicate they are created by VA (Virtual Acoustic) Synthesis.
Strings 1 Strings 2 Strings 3 Strings 4

Strings 5 Strings 6
Strings 7
Tremolo Strings Synth Strings 1 Synth Strings 2
Pizzicato Strings Synth Strings 3
Brass 1 Brass 2
Brass 3 Brass 4
Brass 5
Synth Brass 1 Synth Brass 2 Synth Brass 3
Saw Lead
Clarinet 1 Clarinet 2
Bass Clarinet 1
Synth Clarinet 1 Synth Clarinet 2
Soft Reed
V-Clarinet
Saxophone 1 Saxophone 2 Tenor Sax

Breath Sax
Sax Ensemble 1 Sax Ensemble 2
Soprano Sax Synth Sax Synth Lead 1
Alto Sax V-Soprano Sax Synth Lead 2
Synth Lead 3
Synth Lead 4
Synth Lead 5
Chorus 1 Chorus 2 Chorus 3 Chorus 4

Vocal
Chorus 5
Organ 1 Organ 2
Organ 3
Theatre Organ 1 Theatre Organ 2
Pop Organ 1 Pop Organ 2
Jazz Organ 1 Jazz Organ 2
Jazz Organ 3
Jazz Organ 4
Accordion Organ 4
Bandoneon
Piano 1 Piano 2
Honky Tonk Piano
Electric Piano 1 Electric Piano 2
Harpsichord Electric Piano 3
Clavichord Clavi.
Guitar 1 Guitar 2 Guitar 3

12Str. Guitar Jazz Guitar
Electric Guitar 1 Electric Guitar 2
Steel Guitar
Distorted Guitar Distorted Lead
Muted Guitar Picked Guitar
Mandolin Taisho-koto Sitar V-Sitar
Banjo Shamisen
Harp Koto
Vibraphone Glockenspiel Celesta Music Box

Marimba Xylophone
Chime
Synth Chime
Steel Drum
Cosmic 1 Cosmic 11
Cosmic 13
Custom 4
Cosmic 2 Cosmic 12
Cosmic 14
Custom 3
Cosmic 3 Cosmic 10
Cosmic 15
Cosmic 16
Cosmic 4 Custom 6
Cosmic 5
Cosmic 6 Custom 1
Cosmic 7 Custom 5
Cosmic 8 Talken Lead
Cosmic 9 Custom 2
24
1

ORCHESTRAL
Tutti 1 Tutti 2 Tutti 7
Tutti 3
Tutti 4 Tutti 5
Tutti 6
Harmonica 1 Harmonica 2 Muted Lead

Thin Reed
Horn 1 Horn 2
Horn 3
Horn 4
Muted Horn
LEAD
Violin 1 Violin 2 Violin 3 Bow Strings
Violin 4
Violin 5
Buzz String
Pizzicato Violin
Cello
Kokyu V-Kokyu
Flute 1 Flute 2 Shakuhachi V-Shakuhachi

Recorder Pan Flute Ocarina
Air Reed Pan Pipe
Woody Lead
Whistle Piccolo Yokobue
V-Flute
Oboe 1 Oboe 2 Grass Reed

English Horn
Bassoon 1 Bassoon 2
V-Oboe
Trumpet 1 Trumpet 2 Trumpet 4 Trumpet 6

Trumpet 3 Flugelhorn Euphonium
Muted Trumpet Trumpet 5
Waspy Horn
Trombone 1 Trombone 2
V-Trumpet Muted Trombone
V-Trombone
BASS
Contrabass 1 Contrabass 2
Contrabass 3
Pizzicato Bass Upright Bass
Electric Bass 1 Electric Bass 2

Electric Bass 3
Electric Bass 4
Synth Bass 1 Synth Bass 2 Synth Bass 3 Edge Lead
Organ Bass 1 Organ Bass 2 Organ Bass 4

Organ Bass 3
Tuba Timpani Timpani Roll
The Preset Voices for Upper/Lower Flute Voices

Jazz Organ 1 Jazz Organ 2 Jazz Organ 3 Jazz Organ 4
Pop Organ 1 Pop Organ 2 Pop Organ 3 Pop Organ 4
25
2 Voice Sections
The EL-900 features 207 different high quality voices: 173 AWM/FM voices and 34 VA voices. Each of the
AWM/FM voices can be used on the Upper keyboard, Lower keyboard and Pedalboard.
2 There are five voice sections for the Upper keyboard (including the Upper Flute Voice section), three voice
sections for the Lower keyboard (including the Lower Flute Voice section), and two voice sections for the
Pedalboard. Each voice section can, of course, have its own Voice Condition page(s), which allow you to
Voice Sections
finely set up voice and volume settings.
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE VOLUME UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 2 BRILLIANCE VOLUME LEAD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE VOLUME LEAD VOICE 2 BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT MAX BRILLIANT MAX BRILLIANT MAX BRILLIANT MAX
STRINGS BRASS CLARI- SAXO- CHORUS HARMO- 1 STRINGS BRASS CLARI- SAXO- CHORUS HARMO- 1 VIOLIN FLUTE VA VA
NET PHONE NICA NET PHONE NICA 1 1
ACOUS- VIRTUAL
TIC
ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI OBOE TRUM- TO VA VA SOLO
2 2 PET LOWER
PHONE PHONE ELEC- CUSTOM (KNEE)
TRONIC
MELLOW MIN MELLOW MIN MELLOW MIN MELLOW MIN
LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE VOLUME LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 2 BRILLIANCE VOLUME PEDAL VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE VOLUME PEDAL VOICE 2 BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT MAX BRILLIANT MAX BRILLIANT MAX BRILLIANT MAX
STRINGS BRASS CLARI- SAXO- CHORUS HORN STRINGS BRASS CLARI- SAXO- CHORUS HORN CONTRA ELEC. CONTRA ELEC.
1 1 BASS BASS 1 BASS BASS 1
NET PHONE NET PHONE
ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI ORGAN TUBA TO ORGAN TUBA TO
2 2 BASS LOWER BASS LOWER
PHONE PHONE
MELLOW MIN MELLOW MIN MELLOW MIN MELLOW MIN
1 Selecting Voices from the Panel

Since selection of panel voices follows the same procedure throughout
the various voice sections, instructions for only the Upper Keyboard Voice
1 are given here.
To select voices:
1
NOTE:
Select a voice from the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 section by pressing
one of the Voice buttons in that section.
Lead Voice 2 section consists of the VA
(Virtual Acoustic Synthesis) voices, and UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT MAX
the other sections consist of AWM/FM STRINGS BRASS CLARI- SAXO- CHORUS HARMO- 1
NET PHONE NICA
voices. For the detailed information on the
VA and AWM/FM tone generation system
see page 35 and 119, respectively. ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI 2
PHONE
MELLOW MIN
NOTE:
Voices of the Upper and Lower Flute Voice If, for example, you have selected the ORGAN voice, the following
sections are selected by a different
display (Voice Menu) will appear:
procedure. Refer to the section Flute
Voices on page 40 for details.
Notice that several different voice names are shown on this display.
These are variations of the basic organ voice category.
26
2
Press one of the Data Control buttons that corresponds to voice you
wish to select.
Voice Sections
The selected voice will be shown at the upper row of the LCD. In this
case, Pop Organ 1 appears.
3
If you wish to, you can select voices from the other Upper Keyboard
Voice sections (Upper Voices 2, Lead Voice 1 and Lead Voice 2),
following steps #1 and #2 above.
4 Set the volume for each voice section. There are two volume controls:
Coarse and Fine.
Coarse: Use the VOLUME controls of each voice section on the panel
to set the desired level for each voice. The controls have seven volume
settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full
volume.
BRILLIANT MAX
NET PHONE NICA

PHONE
MELLOW MIN
NOTE:
Fine: Pressing the same panel voice button again (or the same Data
Control button corresponding to the selected voice) calls up the Voice Pressing a voice button once calls up that
voiceﾕs Voice Menu display. Pressing it a
Condition display. Use the Data Control buttons to the far right side
second time calls up the Voice Condition
to change the level of the desired voice. The relative level is indicated display. Successive presses alternate
by the bar under each voice in the display as well as by a numeric between the two displays.
value (from 0-24).
27
5
NOTE:
Now select voices for the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard as you did
for the Upper keyboard above. Also set the volumes of the voices.
The Lead and Pedal Voices sound one note
2 at a time; when you simultaneously press

two or more keys, only the highest note
will sound. 6 Adjust the volume balance between the Upper and Lower Voices with
the Balance Control provided on the Voice Display.
Voice Sections
1. Return to the Voice Display by pressing the VOICE DISPLAY

VOICE EFFECT A. B. C. button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.
2. Adjust the balance with the corresponding Data Control buttons.
FOOT REGIST. EXP.

RHYTHM
VOICE PROGRAM

VOICE VOICE (FAST)
Pressing this pair of Data

DISPLAY SELECT Control buttons at the same
time restores the balance to
the center position.
About TO LOWER - Playing Lead Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 1/

2 from the Lower keyboard:
When the TO LOWER button is turned
on, the Lead voices and Pedal voices
The Electone has a special ﾒTo Lowerﾓ function that lets you assign Lead
cannot be played on the Upper keyboard (Lead Voice 1 only) or Bass voices to the Lower keyboard. Simply press
and Pedalboard, respectively. the TO LOWER button on the voice section you wish to assign, and that
voice will be playable from the Lower keyboard.
NOTE: LEAD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE VOLUME PEDAL VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE VOLUME
VIOLIN FLUTE CONTRA ELEC.
ﾒTo Lowerﾓ function is not available in the 1 BASS BASS 1
Lead Voice 2 section.
OBOE TRUM- TO ORGAN TUBA TO

PET LOWER BASS LOWER
About Mute function:

VOLUME
MAX
The voices of the four voice sections of the Upper keyboard (two in the
COARSE Actual
volume
Lower and Pedal) sound together in a layer, and the balance of the voices
setting in the layer is determined by these VOLUME controls. You can easily
mute the voice of a voice section by holding down the COARSE button
MIN
When muted and pressing the panel volume control of the voice section you wish to
mute. Repeating the procedure restores the original volume setting.
Turning the Electone off erases all panel settings you have made. When the Electone is turned on, Basic Registration 1 is
automatically selected.
If you have made panel settings you wish to keep, save them to Registration Memory (see page 80) before turning the Electone
off.
You can, however, restore the panel settings that were made before the Electone was last turned off. See page 86 for more
information.
28
About Solo Mode
2
Unique to the Lead Voice 2 (VA) section is a Solo Mode function. Solo
Mode lets you instantly switch to a solo Lead voice in the middle of your
performance, muting all other Upper Keyboard voices.
Voice Sections
To Use the Solo Mode:
1
Select the voice in the Lead Voice 2 section that you wish to play
in the Solo Mode.
In this condition, the Normal Mode, all four voice sections for
the Upper Keyboard (Upper Keyboard Voice 1 and 2, and Lead
Voice 1 and 2) can be played.
2
Press the SOLO (KNEE) button in the Lead Voice 2 section. This NOTE:
sets Solo Mode to stand-by status. Pressing it again here returns
to the Normal Mode. Turning on the SOLO (KNEE) button allows
you to use the Knee Lever to switch between
Normal Mode and Solo Mode. Please
3
To activate the Solo Mode, fold the Knee Lever down. remember that the Knee Lever is used to
control other functions such as Sustain; thus,
you may unintentionally add the sustain
effect when using the Knee Lever.
NOTE:
Any notes played while switching between the

Upper and Solo Modes are not abruptly cut off
but continue to sound.
In this condition, the Solo Mode, only the Lead Voice 2 is playable
from the Upper Keyboard. The voice on the Upper Keyboard NOTE:
changes to the voice selected in step #1 above. Fold up the Knee
The Lead voices (Lead Voice 1/2) sound
Lever again to return to the Normal Mode.
only the highest note if two or more keys
are played. However, in the Solo Mode,
4
Press the Knee Lever to the right with your knee while playing the Lead voice (Lead Voice 2) sounds for
the keyboard. the last key played.
In this condition, the Upper Mode, all the voices set to the Upper
Keyboard except for Lead Voice 2 are playable from the Upper NOTE:
Keyboard.
Lead Voice 2 voices cannot be separately
Each time you control (release or press) the Knee Lever you can recorded with the M.D.R.
alternates between the Solo Mode and Upper Mode, as long as
the SOLO (KNEE) button is on.
Upper Keyboard Modes

Solo Button On
Solo Button Off
Knee Lever On Knee Lever Off
(Normal Mode)
(Upper Mode) (Solo Mode)
Upper Keyboard Upper Keyboard

Voice 1, 2 Voice 1, 2
Playable
Voice Lead Voice 1 Lead Voice 1
Sections (highest note priority) (highest note priority)
Lead Voice 2 Lead Voice 2

(highest note priority) (last note priority)
29
2 Selecting Voices from the Dotted Buttons
2 ﾑDotted Buttons and User Voicesﾑ
The EL-900 has a wide variety of voices from which you can choose-far
greater than what is immediately apparent from the front panel controls.
Voice Sections
Youﾕve already learned in the section above how to select the different
voices that are available in the Voice Menu display of each panel voice.
The Electone also has dotted buttons in each voice section (except for
Lead Voice 2, VA), giving you access to even more voices by including
space for storing and recalling voices youﾕve created yourself (User voices)
by using Voice Edit function (page 110). Optional Voice Disk voices
containing many new voices are also being made available for the EL-
900 (page 118).
Each voice section has one or two dotted buttons (except for Lead Voice
2), found on the right side of each voice section. These dotted buttons
function as ﾒwild cardﾓ Voice Menu selectors; any internal or User voices
can be selected from these buttons.
BRILLIANT MAX
NET PHONE NICA

PHONE
MELLOW MIN
The dotted buttons have three basic uses:

･ For playing any voice of the Voice Menus (except for VA voices) from any
of the keyboards or Pedalboard. You can play on the Upper keyboard, for
example, voices from the twenty-two Voice Menu pages (including User),
and not be limited to only the twelve buttons (equivalent to twelve Voice
Menu pages) that make up the Upper Voice section. Another advantage
to this feature is that when the normally monophonic (one note) Lead and
Pedal voices are assigned to the Upper or Lower keyboard Voice sections,
they can be played polyphonically.
･ For having three different voices from the same Voice Menu page available
for selection in the same song. For example, you can assign one of the
voices to a dotted button in the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 section, the second
voice to the other dotted button in the same section, and the third one on
the Voice Menu.
･ For playing the User voices of your own creation or those from a Voice
Disk. (page 110)
NOTE: To select voices from the dotted buttons:
1
The VA voices of the Lead Voice 2 section Press one of the dotted buttons in any of the voice sections.
are not comprised in the Voice Menu pages
which can be selected by the Page buttons, UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE VOLUME
and therefore they cannot be selected using BRILLIANT MAX

the dotted buttons. However, the dotted NET PHONE NICA
button in the Lead Voice 2 section allows

you to select the Voice Menu voices, or
the voices from other voice sections. PHONE
MELLOW MIN
30
2
Select one of the pages with the Page buttons, and choose a Voice
NOTE:
Menu (PIANO, for example).
Each page represents a general voice category and the title of the
2
The VA voices of the Lead Voice 2 section
category appears in the dark bar in the middle of the display when are not comprised in the 22 Voice Menu
pages.
the page has been selected.
Voice Sections
PAGE
NOTE:
You can directly view and select Voice

Menu pages by holding down one of the
Dotted buttons and simultaneously
The voice name shown at the top of the LCD is that of the currently pressing the desired voice buttons in
assigned voice and is irrelevant to the Voice Menu below. succession.
3
Select a voice from the display (PIANO 1, for example) PIANO 1 will
be shown at the top of LCD indicating that it has been selected.
To select User voices:

Select the USER page when you wish to play voices that youﾕve created in
Voice Edit (page 110) or voices from a Voice Disk (page 118)
PAGE
31
3 Voice Menus
2 The following chart lists the voices available and their button/page assignment.
STRINGS Upper/Lower
Voice Sections
STRINGS
Strings Strings Strings Strings Strings Strings Strings
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Pizz. Trem. Synth. Synth. Synth.

Strings Strings Strs.1 Strs.2 Strs.3
VIOLIN Lead
VIOLIN
Violin Violin Violin Violin Violin Pizz.
1 2 3 4 5 Violin
Cello Kokyu
CONTRABASS Pedal
CONTRABASS
Contra Contra Contra Pizz. Uprght
Bass 1 Bass 2 Bass 3 Bass Bass
BRASS Upper/Lower
BRASS
Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass
1 2 3 4 5
Synth. Synth. Synth.

Brass 1 Brass 2 Brass 3
HORN Lower
HORN
Horn Horn Horn Horn Muted
1 2 3 4 Horn
TRUMPET Lead
TRUMPET
Trum- Trum- Trum- Trum- Trum- Trum- Muted
pet 1 pet 2 pet 3 pet 4 pet 5 pet 6 Trp.
Trom- Trom- Muted Flugel Eupho-

bone1 bone2 Trb. Horn nium
TUBA Pedal
TUBA
Tuba Tim- Timp.
pani Roll
FLUTE Lead
FLUTE
Flute Flute Pic- Yoko- Recor- Ocarina Pan Shaku-
1 2 colo bue der Flute hachi
Whis-
tle
OBOE Lead
OBOE
Oboe Oboe Englsh Bas- Bas-
1 2 Horn soon1 soon2
32
Page 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
2
CLARINET Upper/Lower
Voice Sections
CLARINET
Clari- Clari- Bass Synth. Synth.
net 1 net 2 Cla. Cla.1 Cla.2
SAXOPHONE Upper/Lower
SAXOPHONE
Saxo- Saxo- Sopra. Sax. Sax. Synth.
phone1 phone2 Sax. Ens.1 Ens.2 Sax
Synth. Synth. Synth. Synth. Synth.

Lead1 Lead2 Lead3 Lead4 Lead5
TUTTI Upper/Lower
TUTTI
Tutti Tutti Tutti Tutti Tutti Tutti Tutti
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CHORUS Upper/Lower
CHORUS
Chorus Chorus Chorus Chorus Chorus Vocal
1 2 3 4 5
HARMONICA Upper
HARMONICA
Harmo- Harmo-
nica1 nica2
ORGAN Upper/Lower
ORGAN
Organ Organ Organ Organ Jazz Jazz Jazz Jazz
1 2 3 4 Organ 1 Organ 2 Organ 3 Organ 4
Pop Pop Theat. Theat. Accor- Bando-

Organ 1 Organ 2 Organ 1 Organ 2 dion neon
ORGAN BASS Pedal

ORGAN BASS
Organ Organ Organ Organ
Bass 1 Bass 2 Bass 3 Bass 4
PIANO Upper/Lower
PIANO
Piano Piano Honky Elec. Elec. Elec.
1 2 Tonk Piano 1 Piano 2 Piano 3
Harpsi Clavi. Clavi-

-chord chord
GUITAR Upper/Lower
GUITAR
Guitar Guitar Guitar 12Str. Banjo Mando- Sitar Shami-
1 2 3 Guitar lin sen
Elec. Elec. Muted Dist. Harp Steel koto Taisho

Gtr.1 Gtr.2 Guitar Guitar Guitar koto
33
Page 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
2 VIBRAPHONE Upper/Lower
VIBRAPHONE
Vibra- Gloc- Celesta Music Marim- Xylo-
Voice Sections
phone ken. Box ba phone
Chime Synth. Steel

Chime Drum
ELECTRIC BASS Pedal

ELECTRIC BASS
Elec. Elec. Elec. Elec. Synth. Synth. Synth.
Bass1 Bass 2 Bass 3 Bass 4 Bass1 Bass 2 Bass 3
COSMIC Upper/Lower
COSMIC
Cosmic Cosmic Cosmic Cosmic Cosmic Cosmic Cosmic Cosmic
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Cosmic Cosmic Cosmic Cosmic Cosmic Cosmic Cosmic Cosmic

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
USER VOICE
USER VOICE NOTE:
USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The VA voices of the Lead Voice 2 section
USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER
are not comprised in the 22 Voice Menu
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 pages.
LEAD VOICE 2 (VA)

VA ACOUSTIC
VA ACOUSTIC
Flute Oboe Clari- Sopra. Alto Tenor Breath
net Sax. Sax Sax. Sax.
Trum- Trom- Shaku- Kokyu Sitar

pet bone hachi
VA VIRTUAL
VA VIRTUAL
Pan Air Thin Grass Soft
Pipe Reed Reed Reed Reed
Buzz Bow Waspy

String Strings Horn
VA ELECTRONIC
VA ELECTRONIC
Jazz Picked
Guitar Guitar
Saw Edge Dist. Woody Muted Talken

Lead Lead Lead Lead Lead Lead
VA CUSTOM
VA CUSTOM
Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom
1 2 3 4 5 6
* The details for each voices such as octave (feet) setting and effect
on/off status are shown in the list on page 36.
34
About the Virtual Acoustic Synthesis ﾑ VA voices of the Lead
Voice 2 Section
Unlike previous tone generation systems which use oscillators, function
generators, preset waveforms or samples to produce sound, Yamaha
2
Voice Sections
Virtual Acoustic (VA) Synthesis applies sophisticated computer-based
ﾒphysical modelingﾓ technology to musical sound synthesis. In the same
way that computer ﾒmodelsﾓ are used to simulate weather systems or the
flight characteristics of aircraft in the design stage, the Virtual Acoustic
Synthesis simulates the very complex vibrations, resonances, reflections
and other acoustic phenomena that occur in a real wind or string
instrument.
VA Advantages
The VA voices offer many advantages in terms of musical performance. Not just
in terms of sound, but also in terms of the ﾒbehaviorﾓ that makes acoustic
instruments so ﾉ well, musical! Yamaha Virtual Acoustic Synthesis is simply the
most musical tone generation system ever created.
･ The VA voices sound better, have more depth, and are more realistic in
the musical sense than any other tone generation system.
･ Simply playing a note in the same way does not always produce precisely
the same sound. The instrument is responsive and ﾒalive.ﾓ
･ Note-to-note transitions have the same continuity exhibited by acoustic
instruments. What goes on in between the notes is just as important
musically as the notes themselves.
Driver — generates physical energy Pipe/strings — simulates resonation

Calculates the
NOTE:
Mouthpiece speed of the Single-ended
resonated air pipe (saxophone) See page 119 for the information on the
Double-ended
AWM/FM.
Embouchure
pipe (flute)
Bow Strings
35
Details on Each Voice
Preset
Page/Section Voice Name Comments
Feet Effect
1. Upper/Lower Strings 1 8' - Large strings ensemble.
STRINGS Strings 2 8' - Relatively small strings ensemble for contemporary music.
2 Strings 3
Strings 4
Strings 5
8'
8'
8'
-
-
-
Small strings ensemble.
Having specific harmonics for layering other voices.
For legato playing.
Strings 6 8' - Strings with clarity. Appropriate for the fast passages.
Voice Sections
Strings 7 8' - Expressive full bodied strings with a slow attack.

Pizz. Strings 8' - Pizzicato strings.
Trem. Strings 8' - Tremolo strings.
Synth. Strings 1 8' Cele. Synth. strings with softer attack.
Synth. Strings 2 8' Sym. Bright synth. strings.
Synth. Strs. 3 8' - Softer Synth. strings.
2. Lead Violin 1 8' - For multi purposes.
VIOLIN Violin 2 8' - For solo with sharp attack.
Violin 3 8' - Bright fidle for country music.
Violin 4 8' - Darker synth. violin with wider dynamic range.
Violin 5 8' - Violin with deep preset vibrato, also suited for chord playing.
Pizz. Violin 8' - Pizzicato violin.
Cello 8' - Cello with realistic rubbed string-instrument feel.
Kokyu 8' - Ancient Chinese fiddle.
3. Pedal Contrabass 1 8' - Standard type.
CONTRABASS Contrabass 2 8' - True-to-life tight contrabass sounding in an octave unison.
Contra Bass 3 8' - Realistic contrabass solo.
Pizz. Bass 8' - Pizzicato contrabass for classicals.
Upright Bass 8' - For jazz.
4. Upper/Lower Brass 1 8' - Trumpet and trombone ensemble for classicals.
BRASS Brass 2 8' - For big band with brighter attack.
Brass 3 8' - With strong impact. Can be used as orchestra hit.
Brass 4 U16'/L8' - Trombone ensemble.
Brass 5 8' - Tight octave brass for contemporary music.
Synth. Brass 1 8' - Synth. brass with sharp attack. Used for Basic Regist. 5.
Synth. Brass 2 8' - Analog type. Can be used as melody line.
Synth. Brass 3 8' - Fat synth. brass.
5. Lower Horn 1 8' - Standard horn for classicals.
HORN Horn 2 8' - Horn unison solo. Alpenhorn.
Horn 3 8' - For solo playing.
Horn 4 8' - Impressive horn ensemble.
Muted Horn 8' - Muted horn.
6. Lead Trumpet 1 8' - Standard trumpet for classicals.
TRUMPET Trumpet 2 8' - Jazz trumpet 1 with full-bodied sounds.
Trumpet 3 8' - Sweet voice.
Trumpet 4 8' - Jazz trumpet 2 with a peculiar attack.
Trumpet 5 8' - Comical synth. trumpet.
Trumpet 6 8' - Resonant trumpet solo.
Muted Trp. 8' - Harmon mute.
Trombone 1 U16'/L8' - For legato playing.
Trombone 2 U16'/L8' - Bright trombone solo. For fast phrases.
Muted Trb. U16'/L8' - Cup mute.
Flugel Horn 8' - Flugelhorn.
Euphonium U16/L8 - Euphonium with softer sounds.
7. Pedal Tuba 16' - Accentuated by touch
TUBA Timpani 8' - Standard timpani.
Timpani Roll 8' - Typical timpani roll.
8. Lead Flute 1 8' - Standard flute solo.
FLUTE Flute 2 8' - For legato playing.
Piccolo 4' - Standard piccolo.
Yokobue 4' - Japanese pipe with clear sounds.
Recorder 4' - Block floete.
Ocarina 4' - Ocarina with simple but warm sounds.
Pan Flute 8' - Pan Flute.
Shakuhachi 8' - Japanese Shakuhachi with realistic breath noises.
Whistle 4' - Whistle.
* U16'/L8' indicates that the feet settings of each voice are preset to 16' on the upper keyboard and 8' on the lower keyboard.
36
Preset
Feet Effect
9. Lead Oboe 1 8' - Softer oboe.
OBOE Oboe 2 8' - Rounder tone with characteristic tonguing. For fast phrases.
English Horn
Bassoon 1
Bassoon 2
8'
U16'/L8'
U16'/L8'
-
-
-
Cor Anglais.
For legato playing.
For staccato playing.
2
10. Upper/Lower Clarinet 1 8' - Standard clarinet.
Voice Sections
CLARINET Clarinet 2 8' - Clarinet solo for jazz and contemporary.
Bass Cla. 8' - Bass clarinet with fat and resonant sounds.
Synth. Cla. 1 8' - Resonant synth. clarinet.
Synth. Cla. 2 8' - Synth. reed with a unique attack sound.
11. Upper/Lower Saxophone 1 U16'/L8' - Alto sax.
SAXOPHONE Saxophone 2 U16'/L8' - Characteristic tenor sax with strong tonguing.
Sopra. Sax. 8' - Standard soprano sax.
Sax. Ensem. 1 U16'/L8' - Softer sounds for classicals.
Sax. Ens. 2 U16'/L8 - Saxophone section for bigband.
Synth. Sax. 8' - Wind synthesizer with thick sounds in the middle and lower range.
Synth. Lead 1 8' - Softer analog synth. reed.
Synth. Lead 2 8' - Clear synth. reed with a sharp attack.
Synth. Lead 3 4' - Hoarse noise reed.
Synth. Lead 4 8' - Digital synth. reed.
Synth. Lead 5 8' - Synth. reed with thick fourth notes.
12. Upper/Lower Tutti 1 8' - Strings unison and wood winds ensemble.
TUTTI Tutti 2 8' - Strings unison and the brasses.
Tutti 3 8' - The brasses for classicals and bands.
Tutti 4 8' - Big band. Softer playing = sax only. Harder playing = 1 octave higher brasses added.
Tutti 5 8' - Wood winds ensemble. Instruments vary depending on the register played.
Tutti 6 8' - Wood winds quintet.
Tutti 7 8' - Brass ensemble.
13. Upper/Lower Chorus 1 8' - Female "Ah".
CHORUS Chorus 2 8' - Male "Wh".
Chorus 3 8' - Mixed chorus.
Chorus 4 8' - Mixed chorus with beautiful resonance. Wh.
Chorus 5 8' - Scat type vocal ensemble.
Vocal 8' - Accentuated solo vocal, "Ah".
14. Upper Harmonica 1 8' - Standard type with pitch modulated vibrato.
HARMONICA Harmonica 2 8' - Solo harmonica with filter and amplitude modulated vibrato.
15. Upper/Lower Organ 1 8' - Small pipe organ. 8'.
ORGAN Organ 2 8' - Big pipe organ with full coupler.
Organ 3 8' - Nasard stops. 8'+2 2/3'.
Organ 4 8' - Harmonium.
Jazz Organ 1 16' Chor. For solo playing. 16'+8'+5 1/3'.
Jazz Organ 2 16' Trem. 16'+8'+2'.
Jazz Organ 3 16' Trem. For cluster playing. 16'+1 3/5'+1 1/3'+1'.
Jazz Organ 4 16' Trem. Fat and noisy jazz organ.
Pop Organ 1 8' Chor. Bright sounds for jazz. 8'+4'+2 2/3'.
Pop Organ 2 8' Chor. For multi purposes.
Theat. Organ 1 8' Sym. 8'+4' with slower attack.
Theat. Organ 2 8' - 16'+8' with slower attack.
Accordion 8' - Slower attack.
Bandoneon 8' - Attack can be controlled by initial touch.
16. Pedal Organ Bass 1 8' - Combination organ bass.
ORGAN BASS Organ Bass 2 16' - Pipe organ bass 1. Standard type.
Organ Bass 3 16' - For jazz. 16'.
Organ Bass 4 16' - Pipe organ bass 2. Full coupler.
17. Upper/Lower Piano 1 8' - For multi purposes.
PIANO Piano 2 8' - Brighter sounds. CP80 type.
Honkytonk 8' - Honky tonk piano.
Elec. Piano 1 8' Cele. DX7 type.
Elec. Piano 2 8' Cele. Old fashioned, full bodied electric piano.
Elec. Piano 3 8' - Electric piano with clearly brilliant but deep sounds.
Harpsichord 8' - Standard cembalo.
Clavi. 16' - Funky clavi.
Clavichord 8' - Clavichord with stable and grave sounds.
37
Preset
Feet Effect
18. Upper/Lower Guitar 1 U16'/L8' - Folk guitar. Steel string.
2 GUITAR Guitar 2
Guitar 3
12Str. Guitar
U16'/L8'
U16'/L8'
U16/L8
-
-
-
Acoustic jazz guitar. Tone varies depending on the touch.
Classic guitar. Suitable to backing for bossanova.
12-string classic guitar with gorgeous sounds.
Banjo 8' - For country and dixieland.
Voice Sections
Mandolin 8' Cele. Standard mandolin.

Sitar 8' - Indian sitar with the different resonances between lower and mid./high ranges.
Shamisen 8' - Japanese classical shamisen.
Elec. Guitar 1 U16'/L8' - For backing.
Elec. Guitar 2 U16'/L8' - For solo playing.
Muted Guitar U16'/L8' - Muted guitar.
Dist. Guitar U16'/L8' - Distorted guitar.
Harp 8' - Grand harp.
Steel Guitar 8' - Hawaiian guitar. Effective when used with the glide function.
Koto 8' - Japanese Koto.
Taisho Koto 4' Cele. Japanese Taisho Koto.
19. Upper/Lower Vibraphone 8' - Standard vibraphone.
VIBRAPHONE Glocken 4' - Glockenspiel.
Celesta 4' - Celesta.
Music Box 4' - Antique music box.
Marimba 8' - Concert marimba.
Xylophone 4' - Tone varies depending on the initial touch.
Chime 4' - Chime.
Synth. Chime 8' Cele. Starry chime.
Steel Drum 8' - Steel Drum.
20. Pedal Elec. Bass 1 8' - For multi purposes.
ELECTRIC BASS Elec. Bass 2 16' - Slap bass.
Elec. Bass 3 16' - Plucked bass with hard attack.
Elec. Bass 4 16' Cele. Fretless bass, also suited for solo playing.
Synth. Bass 1 16' - Sustained sounds.
Synth. Bass 2 16' - With remarkable attack.
Synth. Bass 3 16' - Tone varies depending on the touch.
21. Upper/Lower Cosmic 1 4' - Decay type. For multi purposes. UK in Basic Regist. 4.
COSMIC Cosmic 2 8' - The lower register of celesta. LK and PK in Basic Regist. 4.
Cosmic 3 8' - Brass type.LK in Basic Regist. 5.
Cosmic 4 8' - Decay type. With fantastic image.
Cosmic 5 8' - Spacious sounds with feedback.
Cosmic 6 8' - Synth. brass type.
Cosmic 7 8' - Vocal type with feedback.
Cosmic 8 8' - Distortion type with feedback.
Cosmic 9 8' - Decay type with unique feedback.
Cosmic 10 8' - Clear synth. pad.
Cosmic 11 8' - Digital synth. pad.
Cosmic 12 8' - Chorus type synth. pad.
Cosmic 13 8' - Special sound effect with a slower attack. The sounds drastically changes.
Cosmic 14 8' - Fantastic digital music box.
Cosmic 15 8' - Ethnic synth. percussion.
Cosmic 16 16' - Special sound effect with a complicated mixture of various sounds.
38
Lead Voice 2 (VA)
2
Preset Recommended
page Voice Name Horizontal Remarks
Feet Effect Range *1
VA Acoustic V-Flute 8 Pitch G2~A6 Flute, containing noise factors, which may squeak in the high register. Setting the Touch
Tone (After) higher and applying keyboard pressure can result in flutter tonguing.
Voice Sections
V-Oboe 8 Pitch C3~F5 Wider dynamic range with the Touch Tone effect.
V-Clarinet 8 Pitch D2~F5 Breath noise in pianissimo and brighter sound with the pitch a little bit lowered in fortissimo.

V-Sopra. Sax. 8 Pitch A 2~D5 Rounder and softer soprano saxophone.

Alto Sax. 8 Pitch D 2~G4 A bright alto saxophone for contemporary music.

Tenor Sax. 16 Pitch A 2~C4 Multipurpose tenor saxophone. Softer in pianissimo and brighter in fortissimo.

Breath Sax. 16 Pitch A 2~C4 Softer tenor saxophone with much breath noise suited for music in slow tempo.

V-Trumpet 8 Embouchrue *2 A 2~A 4 Softer trumpet. Lip-slide can be obtained with the Horizontal touch.
V-Trombone 16 Embouchure E1~G3 Lip-slide can be obtained with the Horizontal touch. Also, cracking image with the After touch.
V-Shakuhachi 8 Embouchure Higher Touch Tone (After) setting increases breath noises and then squeaks the sounds.
V-Kokyu 8 Pitch Palying with softer touch produces hoarse sounds.
V-Sitar 8 Pitch Palying with harder touch squeaks the sounds.
VA Virtual Pan Pipe 8 Pitch E2~G5 Setting the Touch Tone (After) higher and applying keyboard pressure can result in flutter tonguing.
Air Reed 8 Pitch A2~C5 An image of adopting an oboe reed to a saxophone.
Thin Reed 8 Pitch E2~G5 An image of adopting a clarinet mouthpiece to a flute.
Grass Reed 4 Pitch E2~G5 An image of adopting a bassoon reed to a brass wind instrument. After touch changes the pitch.
Soft Reed 8 Embouchure A2~G5 An image of adopting a clarinet mouthpiece to a brass wind instrument.
Buzz String 8 Pitch A2~F5 An image of bowed-wind instrument.
Bow Strings 8 Pitch E1~E6 Artificially synthesized strings.
Waspy Horn 8 Embouchure C1~G4 An image of adopting a brass wind instrument mouthpiece to a wind instrument. After touch
affects the muted condition. Lip-slide can be obtained with the Horizontal touch.
VA Electronic Jazz Guitar 16 Pitch E1~E5 Softer and warm Jazzy sounds.
Picked Guitar 16 Pitch E1~E5 Plucked guitar sounds with a pick.
Saw Lead 8 Pitch C1~C5 Multipurpose lead sounds. After touch affects to change the filter.
Edge Lead 16 Pitch C1~C4 Sound suited for synthe. bass with a sharp attack portion. After touch affects to change the filter.
Dist.Lead 16 Dist. Pitch G1~C5 Distorted lead sounds. Setting the Touch Tone (After) higher and applying keyboard
pressure can raise the pitch one octave.
Woody Lead 8 Pitch C2~G5 Lead sound with woody quality.

Muted Lead 8 Pitch C2~C5 Lead sound with wah-wah effect. After touch affects the wah-wah effect.
Talken Lead 16 Pitch C1~C5 Talkative lead sound. Setting the Touch Tone (After) higher and applying keyboard pressure
can result in hum noises.
VA Custom Custom1 16 Pitch — Sounds tapping an opening of a pipe with your palm.
Custom2 8 Embouchure — Sounds scraping a metalic plate. After touch affect the degree of scraping.
Custom3 8 Pitch — Sounds hitting a metalic plate with a wood block. Initial touch affects to change the
hardness of the wood block.
Custom4 8 Pitch — Softer playing results in sounds of wind. Applying the keyboard pressure (After touch)
produces a distorted guitar sounds.
Custom5 8 Pitch — Jet noise sounds. Applying the keyboard pressure produces lead sounds.
Custom6 8 Pitch — Sounds colliding a metalic plate with another.
*1 Each acoustic instrument has its own suited range. Be aware that exceeding the range may create an unexpected and unrealistic (non-musical) sounds.
*2 Embouchure indicates the tightness of the lips against the reed or against each other in the wind instruments, and the force of the bow against the string.
Notices for VA Voices

Different from the AWM/FM voices the VA voices have unprecedented unique characteristics since they are
closer to acoustic instruments, and thus, you should take care the following things when playing them.
･ Some voices may not sound as you expected in the register lower /or higher than the recommended range.
･ Pitch may be affected by the Initial touch and/or After touch on some voices.
･ Pitch change may not smooth on some voices when Horizontal touch is applied.
･ Portament (Lead Slide) effects may not be smooth on some voices.
･ The lower keys may become unstable when a pattern with one octave pitch change is played.
39
3 Flute Voices (Organ Sounds)
The Flute Voice feature allows you to create your own organ voices, giving you access to an unlimited
combination of organ sounds. With this function, you can recreate all of the classic organ sounds by adjusting
the flute footage levels and the percussive sounds, just like on conventional organs.
There are eight flute footage settings, with three additional footage settings for the attack sound. You can
select various Preset Flute Voices, or create your own and save those to User Voices.
There are five pages: Menu, Footage, Attack, Volume, Save.
3
Flute Voices (Organ Sounds)
1 Creating Flute Voices

FOOT REGIST. EXP.

To create the Flute Voices:
1
RHYTHM
Press one of the Flute Voice buttons (UPPER or LOWER) in the
VOICE PROGRAM
EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE DISPLAY SELECT section.
The FOOTAGE page appears on the LCD and the LED above the
button lights.
VOICE VOICE (FAST)
FOOTAGE
DISPLAY SELECT
NOTE:
Pressing the button again turns the Flute

Voice function off (the LED also turns off),
and changes the LCD to the Voice Display.
Each of the buttons acts as an on/off
switch.
2
Use the Data Control buttons directly under the flute footage numbers
to change each footage volume.
Play the keyboard and listen to the changes in the sound as you adjust
NOTE:
the footage volumes.
The total volume of the all footages are set
on the VOL. page below.
40
3
Press the Page buttons to select the various pages for the other Flute
Voice functions.
ATTACK Page
PAGE

1 2 3
1 Attack Footages
Determines the level of each volume in the percussive portion of the
voice. Footage settings are 4', 2-2/3' and 2'.
2 Attack Length
Determines the duration of the attack sound.
3 Mode
Determines which notes in a held group of notes are given an attack NOTE:
sound.
･ FIRST: Only the first note played will have attack; all other notes "Mode" is common to both Upper and
Lower Flute Voices.
played while the first is held have no attack.
･ EACH: All notes played have an attack sound.
VOLUME Page
PAGE
1 2 3 4 5
1 Click
Determines the volume of the key click sound. Click is independent
of the Attack sound described above.
2 Response
Determines the overall response speed of the sound. Lower settings
make the keyboard response faster; higher settings result in a slower
response, creating a pipe organ effect.
3 Tremolo
Turns the Tremolo effect for the Flute Voice on or off. This is the
primary on/off switch for the Tremolo/Chorus effect. After this has
been set to ON, you can turn the effect on and off during your NOTE:
performance by using the TREMOLO (FAST) button in the DISPLAY
No reverb can be obtained even though
SELECT section. (See the Tremolo section, page 56 for more you raise the level here, unless you raise
information.) the total reverb level using the panel
Reverb buttons (page 52).
4 Reverb
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Flute Voice voice.
Range: 0-24 NOTE:
5 Volume If the Volume is set to 0, no sound will be

Determines the overall volume of the Flute Voice voice. produced.
Range: 0-24
41
2 Save to User Flute Voice
Saves the currently created Flute Voice to the selected User Flute Voice
memory space.
After you have created a Flute Voice with the Flute, Attack and Volume
pages, you can save that Flute Voice.
3 To save your own Flute Voice:
1
Press the Page buttons to select the SAVE page.

NOTE:
All settings in the Footage, Attack and

SAVE Page
PAGE
Volume pages can be saved to the Save
page, except for the following: Attack
Mode, Tremolo On/Off, Reverb and
Volume.
2
Select the desired user voice number (USER 1 through 8) to which
the new voice will be saved.
Pressing the appropriate Data Control button saves your new Flute
Voice to that memory space and erases any voice that had been
previously saved there. When the operation has been completed, the
selected User number in the display will momentarily flash.
User voices 1 through 8 correspond to those shown in the Menu page
below.
42
3 Using Preset and User Voices
To call up the Preset Voices and User Voices:
1
Press the Page buttons to select the MENU page.
MENU Page
PAGE
3

2
Select Preset or User Flute Voices.
NOTE:
Eight factory-preset voices (four Jazz Organ and four Pop Organ
voices) are set to the upper row, and the eight User voices in the The User area described in this section has
bottom row are for selecting voices you created and stored with the no relation to that of the Voice Menu page.
SAVE page.
NOTE:
When you use the Upper/Lower Flute

Voices and/or other voices at the same
time, only one of the voices can be
displayed at a time, even though all voices
may be operative and both of the Upper
and Lower Flute Voice LEDs are lit.
NOTE:
Remember that the UPPER and LOWER

FLUTE VOICE buttons are on/off
switches. In the process of turning on a
Flute Voice, then switching to another
function and returning to the Flute Voice,
you may unintentionally turn the Flute
Voice off. Check whether the Flute Voice
LEDs are on or off before you start to play.
43
4 Voice Controls and Effects
The Electone is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the sound of the
voices: Voice Controls and Effects.
Voice controls are used to change various aspects of the voices, such as the touch sensitivity fortified with
Horizontal touch, volume, octave (footage), vibrato, pan setting and brilliance. The voice controls, as well as
the selection of certain effects, are provided in the Voice Condition pages, described below.
Effects are an extremely versatile set of tools through which you can enhance the sound of the voices. They
include: Reverb, Sustain, Tremolo, Symphonic, Delay, Flanger and Distortion. Effect settings are controlled
from the Reverb, Sustain, Tremolo and Effect Set pages.
Each voice has been given certain factory-preset effect settings to best enhance its sound. However, if you
wish, you can change the sound to suit your preferences by using the controls described in this section.
4
The chart below shows the various voice controls and effects for the individual voice sections. Available
functions are indicated by circles.
Touch PITCH Feet Pan Brilliance Sym- Delay Flanger Distortion Vibrato Lead Lead Reverb Sustain Tremolo
Voice Controls and Effects
Tone phonic/ Slide Tune /Chorus

(Initial/ Celeste
*1 *2
After)
Upper Keyboard
Voice 1
Upper
Upper Keyboard
Voice 2
Lower Keyboard
Voice 1
Lower
Lower Keyboard
Voice 2
Lead Voice 1
Lead
Lead Voice 2
Pedal Voice 1
Pedal
Pedal Voice 2
Voice Condition
Page 1
Voice Condition
Page 2
Voice Condition
Related Pages
Page 3
Effect Set Page
Reverb Page
Sustain Page
Tremolo Page
*1 The total reverb depth and length are controlled on the reverb page 1, though the different reverb settings can be done for each voice section.
*2 Turning tremolo/chorus on/off and switching between tremolo and chorus are common to all voice sections.
*3 The contents of the Voice Condition Page 2 and Effect Set Page are the same except for the Brilliance setting.
To change the settings and add the effects, display the appropriate page:
1. Voice Condition page by pressing the panel voice button twice NOTE:
(or pressing the Data Control button corresponding to the
selected voice). Sustain, Reverb and Tremolo/Chorus can
be set for the Upper/Lower Flute Voices.
2. Effect Set page by pressing the EFFECT SET button in the
DISPLAY SELECT.
3. Reverb, Sustain or Tremolo page by pressing the corresponding
44 panel button.
1 Selecting from Voice Condition
Pages
To call up the Voice Condition page:
Choose a voice on the panel, then press that voiceﾕs panel button again (or
again press the Data Control button corresponding to the selected voice).
LEAD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT MAX
4
VIOLIN FLUTE 1
OBOE TRUM- TO
PET LOWER

MELLOW MIN
The Voice Condition display pages of the various voice sections have slight
differences in their functions.
Each function in the Voice Condition page is independently applied to each
voice section.
Voice Condition [PAGE 1]

Upper/Lower
Pedal
1 -1 1 -2 2 3 4 5 6
1
1 TOUCH TONE
The Touch Tone function gives you expressive control over the volume and
timbre of a voice. Two types of keyboard touch affect this function: Initial
Touch and After Touch.
All voices are provided with this expressive function, making it possible to
perfectly reproduce the subtle dynamic and tonal changes of actual
instruments. For example, piano voices sound much brighter when you hit
the keys strongly, especially in the attack portion of the sound ﾑ exactly as if
you were playing an acoustic piano.
1 -1 INITIAL Touch
NOTE:
Controls volume and timbre according to the velocity at which you
strike the keys. The harder you strike the keys, the greater the volume Generally, After Touch has no effect on
and the brighter the timbre will become. percussive voices (such as Piano,
Harpsichord or Vibraphone) or percussion
1 -2 AFTER Touch sounds.
Controls volume and timbre according to the pressure you apply to
the keys after playing them. The harder, you press down on the keys, NOTE:
the greater the volume and the brighter the timbre will become.
Minimum setting produces no effect at all.
45
NOTE: 2 PITCH (Horizontal Touch)
Horizontal Touch is not available on the Horizontal Touch allows you to controls the pitch by holding down the keys and
Pedalboard. pressing them laterally. In general the faster (and wider) you press the keys
laterally (right and left) the faster (and greater) the pitch change becomes, within
NOTE: the range of ｱ one octave. You can use this function combined with the Touch
Tone described above to play a unique performance that has not been possible
Horizontal Touch may affect not only the
before.
pitch but the timbre on some voices in the
Lead Voice 2 section.
3 FEET
Determines the octave setting of the voice. PRESET is the original (factory)
4 setting; 4' is the highest and 16' is the lowest. 2' setting is added to the Pedal
Voice sections.
4 PAN
Determines the position of the voice in the stereo image. Seven pan positions
are available.
NOTE:
No reverb can be obtained even though 5 REV.(REVERB)

you raise the level here, unless you raise
the total reverb level using the panel Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice section.
Reverb buttons (page 52). Range: 0-24
6 VOL. (VOLUME)
Fine adjustment of the voice volume. See page 27 for more information.

Press the Page buttons to select PAGE 2.
PAGE
1 2
1-2 1 EFFECT
1-3
1-4
Determines the effect type applied to each voice section. The settings and
1-1 adjustments for the effects are also made from the Effect Set pages. (For more
1-5
1-6 information, see page 48.)
1-7
1-1 PRESET:
Selects the original (factory) effect.
1-2 OFF:
Cancels the effect.
1-3 TREM. (TREMOLO):
Selects Tremolo/ Chorus. See page 57 for the details of the Tremolo/
Chorus setting.
46
1-4 SYMPH. (SYMPHONIC):
Selects Symphonic/ Celeste. See page 49 for the details of the
Symphonic/ Celeste setting.
1-5 DELAY:
Selects Delay. See page 49 for the details of the Delay setting.
1-6 FLANG. (FLANGER):
Selects Flanger. See page 50 for the details of the Flanger setting.
1-7 DIST. (DISTORTION):
Selects Distortion. See page 51 for the details of the Distortion setting.
2 BRIL.(BRILLIANCE) 4
Adjustment of the voice tone. Higher settings make the voice brighter. (This

control is the same as on the panel.) Range: -3- +3

Press the Page buttons to select PAGE 3.
PAGE Upper/Lower/Pedal
1 -1 1 -2 1 -3 1 -4 2 3 -1 3 -2 4
1 3
The Lead Slide and Lead Tune functions are only available with the Lead
Voice sections.
1 VIBRATO NOTE:
The User vibrato may not be effective for

1 -1 PRESET/USER some voices such as Harmonica2,
Selects Preset, which calls up the original (factory) vibrato settings Electric Piano1 and Synth. Chime.
for the voice, or User, which lets you adjust the vibrato settings
yourself. NOTE:
1 -2 DELAY The Delay, Depth and Speed settings are

Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a not displayed and cannot be adjusted
unless USER has been selected in this
key and the start of the vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher settings setting.
increase the delay of the vibrato onset.
Vibrato Control
1 -3 DEPTH Speed
Delay
Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher
Depth
settings result in a more pronounced vibrato.
1 -4 SPEED
Determines the speed of the vibrato effect (see diagram).
NOTE:
When you set the DEPTH to 0, the

Touch Vibrato function will be inactive.
47
2 TOUCH VIB. (TOUCH VIBRATO)
On/Off switch for the Touch Vibrato function.
Touch Vibrato lets you apply vibrato to individual notes as you play them.
While playing a key, press down harder on it to give the note vibrato. The
harder you press the key down, the greater the vibrato will be.
3 SLIDE (Lead voices only)

Slide applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. For example, if
you play one note, then play another before completely releasing the first
note, the pitch of the first note will ﾒslideﾓ up or down to the second note. The
4 Slide function is effective within a one-octave range.
3-1 ON/KNEE/OFF
On/Off switch and knee lever selector for the Slide effect.
3-2 TIME
Determines the speed of the slide or portamento effect. The higher
the value that is set, the slower the speed.
4 TUNE (Lead voices only)

Determines the pitch of the Lead voice. This control lets you detune the Lead
voice relative to the other voices of the Electone, for producing a richer sound.
The higher the value set, the higher the pitch. Range: 0-24 (max. 28.88 cents;
1 step= Ca.1.2cents)
2 Selecting from Effect Set Pages

Pressing the EFFECT SET button in the DISPLAY SELECT section calls
NOTE:
up the Effect Set pages. The page contents are the same as the ones from
You can select the voice section to which the Voice Condition Page 2 except for the Brilliance. See page 46 for the
the effect should be applied, by pressing functions of the PRESET and OFF.
the Page buttons.
Effect Set Page
FOOT REGIST. EXP.

RHYTHM
VOICE PROGRAM

VOICE VOICE (FAST)
DISPLAY SELECT
48
1 TREM./CHOR. (TREMOLO/CHORUS)
See Tremolo section on page 56. Independently applied to each voice section.
2 SYMP. (SYMPHONIC/CELESTE)
Determines the type of the Symphonic effect, SYMPHONIC (SYMP.) or
CELESTE (CELE.). Symphonic is a subtle echo effect that makes one voice
sound like an ensemble. For example, a solo violin voice played through
Symphonic would sound like many violins playing together. SYMPHONIC
simulates the effect of a large ensemble, while CELESTE creates the effect of
a gradually expanding sound. Independently applied to each voice section.
4

2 2 -2 2 -1
2-1 SYMPHONIC
Selects the Symphonic effect to the designated voice section.
2-2 CELESTE
Selects the Celeste effect to the designated voice section.
3 DELAY
Delay is a pronounced echo effect, with distinct delayed repeats of the original
sound. Independently applied to each voice section.
Delay Effect
Signal
Adjusts the level
balance using
Time BALANCE
parameter
Delayed Signal
Adjusts the delay interval using TIME parameter
Adjust the number of repeated sounds using FEEDBACK parameter
49
3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4
3
4 3 -1 TIME
Determines the time between delayed repeats. Range: 5ms - 956ms
3 -2 F.B. (Feedback)
Determines the number of delayed repeats. Range: 0.2% - 46.9%
3 -3 BAL. (Balance)
Determines the volume of the delay effect, relative to the original
sound. Higher settings produce a louder delay. Range: 0% - 100%
3 -4 MODE
Selects the delay type from Mono, ST (Stereo) 1, 2, 3.
Selecting one of the Stereo Delays produces more expanding image
or an image sounds move from right to left (or left from right).
Range: MONO, ST.1, ST.2, ST.3
Characteristics of Each Stereo Type

ST.1: produces the most complicated reflections.
ST.2: repeats the periodical movements in the following order:
center→right →left.
ST.3: adds thickness and brilliance to the mono delay.
4 FLANGER
Flanger introduces a swirling, animated modulation effect to the sound.
Independently applied to each voice section.
Flanger Effect
Signal Changes the pitch using

SPEED parameter Sets the depth using
DEPTH parameter
Time
Intensifies the pitch change

using FEEDBACK parameter
50
4-1 4-2 4-2
4
4 -1 SPEED
4
Determines the speed of the modulation. Range: 0Hz - 12.1Hz

4 -2 F.B. (Feedback)
Controls the brightness and the metallic sound of the effect.
Range: 0.6% -94.0%
4 -3 DEPTH
Determines the intensity of the effect. Range: 37.8% - 87.8%
5 DISTORTION
Distortion adds a distorted image to the sounds usually found in electric
guitars. Independently applied to each voice section.
Distortion Effect
Determines the depth
Signal using LEVEL parameter
Changes the
timbre using
HIPASS
parameter
5-1 5-2
5
5 -1 LEVEL
Determines the depth of the distorted sounds.
Range: 0dB - 21.8dB
5 -2 HI PASS
Changes the timbre of the distorted sounds.
Range: 20Hz - 1036Hz
51
3 Selecting from the Panel
Reverb, Sustain and Tremolo/Chorus pages are called up by pressing the
respective panel buttons.
1) Reverb
Reverb adds an echo-like effect to the sound, giving the impression of a
performance in a large room or concert hall. The effect can be applied equally
and simultaneously to all voices, or set individually for each voice section of
the Electone, even independently for rhythm and accompaniment.
4
To adjust the reverb effect and call up the Reverb pages:
Press one of the REVERB buttons, located to the left of the Upper Keyboard
Voices section.
REVERB
MAX
MIN
REVERB Page 1
PAGE
1 2 3 4
1 TYPE
Determines the type of reverb effect: Room, Hall or Church. Each
type simulates a different acoustic environment; Room is the smallest
and Church the largest.
2 LENG. (Length)
Determines the acoustic liveliness of the simulated room in the effect.
Higher settings make the room more reverberant.
Range: 0-6
3 DEPTH
NOTE: Fine adjustment of the depth of reverberation or the level of the
When this parameter or the panel REVERB
reflected sounds. (Coarse reverb depth settings are made with the
control is set to the minimum, the settings front panel REVERB controls.) A setting of 0 cancels the reverb effect.
in the pages that follow have no effect. Range: 0-24
4 SET
Uniforms the Length and Depth settings set for all registrations to
the currently displayed values on the LCD.
52
Selecting LENG. (LENGTH) will display the following message.
Select [Uniform] to set the current Length value for all registrations
in the 16 Registration Memories. Select [Cancel] to abort the operation.
4

Selecting DEPTH will display the following message.
Select [Uniform] to set the current Depth value for all registrations in
the 16 Registration Memories. Select [Cancel] to abort the operation.
REVERB Page 2
Determines the amount of Reverb effect applied to each voice section.
Each parameter corresponds to REV. (REVERB) in the Voice Condition page
1.
PAGE
1 2 3
53
1 UPPER 1, 2, FLUTE Sections
Determines the amount of reverb applied to each voice section. Range:
0-24
2 LOWER 1, 2, FLUTE Sections
Determines the amount of reverb applied to each voice section. Range:
0-24
3 LEAD 1, 2 Sections
Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Lead Voice section.
Range: 0-24
4 REVERB Page 3
Determines the amount of Reverb effect independently applied to Pedal Voice
sections, Rhythm section and Accompaniment.
Each parameter corresponds to REV. (REVERB) in the respective pages.

PAGE
1 2 3
1 PEDAL 1, 2 Sections
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Pedal Voice sections.
Range: 0-24
2 RHYTHM ACC. (Accompaniment)
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Accompaniment
(mentioned on page 70). Range: 0-24
3 RHYTHM PER. (Percussion)
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythm pattern
percussion sounds (mentioned on page 69) . Range: 0-24
54
2) Sustain
The Sustain effect, selectable for the Upper, Lower and Pedal voices, causes NOTE:
voices to gradually fade out when the keys are released. The sustain on/off Sustain cannot be applied to the Lead
and sustain length settings are independent for each keyboard, providing voices.
maximum expressive control.
NOTE:
To add sustain to the voices and call up the Sustain Length page: If Knee Lever control of the Upper or
Lower sustain has been turned on (folded
down), pressing the Upper or Lower
Press one of the SUSTAIN buttons in the SUSTAIN section.
buttons here will not add sustain unless
4
SUSTAIN the Knee Lever is pushed (See page 153
UPPER
for more information.).
(KNEE)

NOTE:
LOWER PEDAL
(KNEE)
Remember that the SUSTAIN buttons are
on/off switches. If you use them to simply
check the sustain length values, you may
The lamp of the button lights up to indicate that sustain is on. Press the unintentionally change the on/off status of
the effect. Remember to check whether
button again to turn sustain off.
the sustain button lamps are on or off
before you start to play.
SUSTAIN LENGTH Page
UPPER/LOWER/PEDAL
NOTE:
Determines the length of sustain applied to each keyboard.
The display shows the current sustain length values for each keyboard. The values here must be set high enough
Range: 0-12 for the sustain effect to be noticeable.
55
3) Tremolo/Chorus
Tremolo recreates the rich, swirling sound of the popular rotating speaker
effect. Just as with a conventional rotating speaker, you can switch between
slow and fast speeds. And like a motor-driven speaker, the characteristic
tremolo effect gradually changes speed after it is switched. You can also
adjust the maximum speed of the effect to suit your playing style. The Tremolo
effect can be switched in real time as you play with either the front panel
button or the Left Footswitch (when properly set for Footswitch operation).
■ Tremolo Operation
4 For Panel Voices (Voice Menu) For Upper/Lower Flute Voice
1 1
Select (turn on) Tremolo effect Turn on Tremolo effect

in each Voice Condition in VOL. (Volume) page of
page 2. Flute Voices.
2
Adjust the Tremolo setting in Tremolo
Control (or Effect Set) page.
3
Assign footswitch for Tremolo Control, if desired.
Turn on Tremolo as you play,
with Tremolo button or Footswitch.
56
1) Turning on the Tremolo effect (set to standby):
Before you can switch Tremolo on and off in real time, you must first turn the
effect on in the various voice sections. This doesnﾕt actually start the effect,
but merely puts Tremolo in a ﾒstandbyﾓ condition.
Tremolo can be applied selectively to the voice sections; in other words, the
Upper Keyboard voices can have the Tremolo effect while the Lead voices
have another effect or no effect at all.
Select (turn on) Tremolo

■ For Lead, Upper, Lower and Pedal (Voice Menu) voices
1. Press the desired voice button on the panel twice to display one of
the Voice Condition pages.
4

LEAD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT MAX
VIOLIN FLUTE 1
OBOE TRUM- TO
PET LOWER
MELLOW MIN
2. Then press the Page buttons to select the Voice Condition page 2.
PAGE
3. Select TREM. to turn on Tremolo for the selected Voice section

(or the currently assigned voice group).
■ For Flute Voices

1. Press the U. FLUTE VOICE button and/or L. FLUTE VOICE
button in the DISPLAY SELECT section to display one of the Flute
Voice pages.
2. Then press the Page buttons to select the VOL page.
PAGE
FOOT REGIST. EXP.

RHYTHM
VOICE PROGRAM

VOICE VOICE (FAST)
3. Select ON in TREM. turns on Tremolo for the current Flute Voice. DISPLAY SELECT
57
2) Setting the Tremolo effect
Tremolo setting made here are global; in other words , they are applied the
same to all voices for which Tremolo has been turned on (set to standby).
To turn on the Tremolo effect and call up the Tremolo Control page:
Press the TREMOLO (FAST) button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.
The lamp of the button lights up to indicate that Tremolo is on. Press the
FOOT REGIST. EXP.
button again to turn Tremolo off and Chorus on (the LED turns off).
TREMOLO CONTROL Page
4 VOICE
EDIT
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
PATTERN SEQUENCE

VOICE VOICE (FAST)
DISPLAY SELECT
1 2
1 TREM. SPEED (Tremolo Speed)

Determines the speed of the Tremolo (rapid rotation) effect. Range:
4.75Hz - 7.77Hz
2 CHOR. MODE (Chorus Mode)
Determines the effect applied when Tremolo is switched off: a slow
chorus effect (SLOW) or STOP. Use the SLOW setting when you
want to have a constant rotating speaker sound.
3) Realtime control of Tremolo effect

Once the Tremolo effect has been turned on and set, you can control the
effect in real time from the panel or from the Left Footswitch.
Panel Control
Simply press the TREMOLO (FAST) button in the DISPLAY SELECT section
to turn the Tremolo effects on and off while you're playing.
This button functions just like the fast/slow switch on an actual rotating speaker
cabinet. When Tremolo is on, the rotation effect is fast; when off (Chorus), it
is slow. The speed change is gradual, effectively simulating the slowing down
and speeding up of a rotating speaker.
Footswitch Control
You can also use the Left Footswitch to control the Tremolo effect in the same
way, if the Footswitch has been properly assigned. (See the section Footswitch
Assign on page 151 for details.)
58
5 Rhythm and Accompaniment
The Rhythm features of the Electone use actual drum and percussion sampled sounds to automatically play
various rhythms. Automatic Accompaniment functions are used with the rhythms, providing appropriate
and completely automatic accompaniment to match the style of the selected rhythm. Moreover, the Electone
has a Keyboard Percussion feature that allows you to play drum and percussion sounds from the Lower
keyboard and Pedalboard.
1 Selecting Rhythms from the Panel

Ten different rhythm categories in various styles can be instantly selected
from the front panel. The Electone has many more ﾒhiddenﾓ rhythms,
however. A total of 66 rhythms are available, and can be selected by
using the display.
1) To select and play a rhythm: 5

1
Rhythm and Accompaniment

Choose a rhythm by pressing one of the Rhythm buttons in the Rhythm
section on the panel.
RHYTHM VOLUME
MAX
SEQ. SEQ. MARCH WALTZ SWING BOUNCE SLOW
1 2 ROCK 1
SEQ. SEQ. TANGO LATIN 1 LATIN 2 8 BEAT 16 BEAT 2

3 4
MIN
From this display, you can also select other rhythms. These additional
patterns are generally variations on the basic rhythm categories.
2
Press the Data Control button corresponding to the rhythm you wish
to play, as you do with the voices. The selected rhythm will be shown
at the upper row of LCD.
59
3
Turn the rhythm on. You can use one of three buttons to turn on the
rhythm:

ENDING START
3 2 1
FILL IN
1 START
This button does as its name indicates; the rhythm begins as soon as
the button is pressed. To stop the rhythm, press this button again.
2 SYNCHRO START
5 This button puts the rhythm in ﾒstand-byﾓ; the rhythm will start when
you press a note on the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard. To stop the
rhythm, press this button again.
NOTE:
3 INTRO. ENDING
The Left Footswitch can also be used to Pressing this button automatically adds a short introduction (of up to
turn the rhythm on and off in the middle eight measures) before starting the actual rhythm. First, press the
of song. To assign the Footswitch for INTRO. ENDING button, then the START or SYNCRO START button
rhythm control, see page 151.)
to actually start the rhythm.
While the introduction is playing, the display shows the countdown to
NOTE: the first measure of the pattern. For example, if there is a eight-measure
ABOUT SYNCHRO START: lead-in for a pattern in 4/4 time, the following display appears:
Synchro Start functions quite differently Pressing the INTRO. ENDING button again while the pattern is being
when the Auto Bass Chord feature is played will automatically add an ending phrase before stopping the
turned on and the Accompaniment
rhythm.
Memory is turned off. The rhythm starts
when a key on the Lower keyboard is
played, but then immediately stops when BAR/BEAT
the key is released. To keep this from

happening, turn the Memory function on.
(Refer to the Automatic Accompaniment TEMPO
section, page 68, for details on Auto Bass
Chord and Memory.)
LEAD IN
Pressing the START button while holding down the INTRO.
ENDING button automatically plays a special one-measure Lead
In, with a click on each beat, to cue you in to the beginning of the
song.
4
Set the volume.
NOTE: Press the VOLUME controls to the right of the Rhythm buttons to set the
desired level of the rhythm. The controls have seven volume settings, from
When the Electone is turned on, the
Rhythm Volume is automatically set to 0. a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full volume.
Fine adjustments in the volume of the rhythm can also be made from
the Rhythm Condition page (page 62).
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
60
5
Set the tempo.
TEMPO
BAR/BEAT
TEMPO
1 2
(TEMPO Display: shows current tempo)
1 TEMPO Dial
For adjusting the speed of the rhythm. Turn the dial clockwise to
increase the tempo, and counter-clock wise to decrease it.
2 TEMPO Display (BAR/BEAT Indicator)
Shows the current tempo. (Displayed values are given in beats per
5
minute, just as on a conventional metronome.) The tempo range is
40 to 240 beats per minute.
When the rhythm begins playing, the TEMPO display changes

function to a Bar/Beat indicator.
The number on the left
indicates the current bar NOTE:
BAR/BEAT or measure and the one
on the right indicates
the number of the beat When you turn the TEMPO Dial even
in each bar. while the rhythm is playing, the display
The beat indicator lamp
TEMPO above the display also momentarily changes to show the current
indicates the beats.
tempo.
(BAR/BEAT Indicator: shows the
current position in the measures)
2) To use the Fill In patterns:

Fill In patterns are designed to be used as temporary and regular rhythmic NOTE:
breaks to spice up a repeating rhythm. Like the regular rhythms, all Fill In
patterns have been designed to perfectly match the bass and chord parts of USING A FILL IN FOR THE START OF A
SONG:
the Automatic Accompaniment feature.
Fill In patterns can also be used as
introductions; simply press the FILL IN
1
Select and play a rhythm. button before starting the rhythm with the
START or SYNCHRO START buttons.
2
As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press NOTE:
the FILL IN button.
PLAYING PARTIAL FILL IN PATTERNS:
For best results, press the FILL IN button just at the beginning or the You can also start Fill In patterns within a
first beat of a measure. bar, in order to play only the final one or
two beats of the Fill In pattern and create
INTRO.
ENDING
SYNCHRO
START
START additional rhythmic interest. Since the Fill
In feature is very sensitive to bar/beat
boundaries, you should be very careful to
ﾒplayﾓ the FILL IN button precisely on (or
just slightly before) the beat that you want
the Fill In pattern to begin.
FILL IN
61
2 Rhythm Condition Pages
The Rhythm Condition includes the following two pages: the Rhythm
Condition page used to adjust the rhythms and the Instrument page
used to make up each drum/ percussion instrument, each of which
comprises the rhythms and is playable using the Keyboard Percussion
function.
1) To select the Rhythm Condition page:

Choose a rhythm, and press that patternﾕs panel button again (or again press
the Data Control button corresponding to the selected rhythm). (The button
should be pressed only once if the Rhythm display has already been called up;
otherwise press the button twice.)
5 Rhythm Condition Page
NOTE:
See page 68 for the information on A.B.C.
1 2 3 4 5
NOTE: 1 AUTO VARI. (Auto Variation)

The Auto Variation function lets you set pattern variations to be played
The Auto Variation function is not applied automatically. When set to ON, Auto Variation automatically substitutes
to some of the rhythms.
additional pattern variations to make the rhythm more interesting and
complex.
2 PERCUSSION REV. (Reverb)
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythms and
percussion sounds used in the rhythms. When the panel REVERB
control is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect.
Range: 0-24
(See page 54 for the detailed information on the Reverb effect.)
3 PERCUSSION BAL. (Balance)
Determines the balance between two main sound types of the rhythms:
the drum sounds and the cymbal sounds. Higher settings emphasize
the cymbal sounds, while lower settings emphasize the drums.
4 PERCUSSION VOL. (Volume)
Fine adjustment of the overall volume of the rhythms and Keyboard
Percussion (page 71).
5 ACC. VOL. (Accompaniment Volume)
(This control is the same as that described in the Accompaniment
section, page 70.)
62
2) To select the Instrument page:
Choose a rhythm, and press that patternﾕs panel button again (or again press
the Data Control button corresponding to the selected rhythm) to display the
Rhythm Condition page. Then press the Page buttons to select INST.
(Instrument) page.
Instrument Page
NOTE:
1
Though independent Tune, Pan, Reverb
and Volume settings can be made each
instrument, only one set of settings is
available. (Settings cannot be memorized
to Registration Memory.)
2 3 4 5 6 7
In this page, individual drum and percussion sounds used to make up the
Rhythms and Keyboard Percussion can be given independent settings.
5
The changes made here affect the entire

1 Instrument Name instrument settings including the Preset/
This shows the name of the currently selected instrument. To select User rhythm patterns and Keyboard
Percussion. Consequently, you may
a different instrument, press the key or pedal to which the sound is
unintentionally have modified the settings
assigned. (Refer to page 128 for instrument/key assignments of the you didnﾕt want to change. Executing the
Rhythm Pattern Program.) Copy Preset (shown below) operation
returns you to the factory preset settings.
2 TUNE
Determines the pitch of the currently selected instrument.
NOTE:
Range: -6 - 0 - +6
3 PAN The volume of the voice section(s) on the
keyboard on which you want to set an
Determines the position of the currently selected instrument in the
instrument should be turned off.
stereo image. Seven pan positions are available.
4 REV. (Reverb) NOTE:
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently selected
instrument. Loading the registration data created on
the ELX-1 will set the Pan, Reverb and
Range: 0 - 24
Volume settings to the values set for the
5 VOL. (Volume) ELX-1 and reset the Tune setting to the
Determines the fine volume setting of the currently selected factory preset value. Using registration
data created on other Electone models will
instrument. restore all Instrument Page settings to the
Range: 0-24 factory preset status.
6 ASSIGN (NORMAL/EXTEND)
Selects the instrument set you want to use. Two types are available:
NORMAL: Selects the instruments assigned to the Upper/Lower
keyboards.
EXTEND: Selects the instruments which are normally assigned to
the outside of the keyboard range.
NOTE:
7 COPY./PRESET
Replaces the current user settings with the factory preset settings. Refer to page 128 for the instrument
assignments of each set.
63
To use the Copy function, press one of the rightmost Data Control buttons.
The following display will then appear:
Press any of the Data Control buttons below [Copy] in the display to erase all
user settings and restore the preset data. When [Copy] is selected, a
ﾒCompletedﾓ message momentarily appears on the display.
5 Press any of the Data Control buttons below [Cancel] in the display to abort
the operation.
3 Dotted Buttons and User Rhythms

The Rhythm section also has, like the voice sections, dotted buttons from
which rhythms can be selected. These dotted buttons function as ﾒwild
cardﾓ rhythm selectors; any of the rhythms available from the panel
buttons, the Rhythm Menus or User rhythms can be selected from these
NOTE: buttons.
As with the Voice sections dotted buttons,
you can set two or three rhythms from the 1) To select a rhythm from a dotted button:
same page to be selected from different
1
buttons (one from the original Rhythm Press one of the dotted buttons on the right side of the Rhythm section.
button, and the others from the dotted RHYTHM VOLUME
buttons). MAX
1 2 ROCK 1

3 4
MIN
The Rhythm Menu page appears.
64
2
Select one of the pages with the Page buttons.
PAGE
Each page represents the same general rhythm types as those selected
from the panel buttons. The currently assigned rhythm name appears
at the top of the display when the page has been selected.
The rhythm name shown at the top of the LCD is that of the currently
assigned rhythm and is irrelevant to the Rhythm Menu below.
3
Press the Data Control button corresponding to the rhythm you wish
to use.
5
2) To call up the User rhythms:

You can select the User page and rhythm when you wish to play the rhythms
youﾕve created with the Rhythm Pattern Programmer function (page 142). NOTE:
When you select the user rhythm with the
1
Press Page buttons to select the USER page. Lower Rhythmic function turned on,
ﾒRHYTHMICﾓ will be shown above the
ﾒACCOMPANI.ﾓ on the LCD display.
2
Press to select the User rhythm number and its Type.
PAGE
65
4 Rhythm Menus
This chart lists all 66 of the rhythms available on the Electone. The
rhythm names in the chart correspond to the ones shown at the top right
on the display.
MARCH
MARCH
March March March Polka Polka
1 2 3 1 2
Coun- Coun- Broad- Baro-

try1 try2 way que
WALTZ
5 Waltz
1
Waltz
2 3
WALTZ
Waltz Waltz
4
Waltz
5
Jazz Jazz Jazz Bolero

Waltz 1 Waltz 2 Waltz 3
SWING
SWING
Swing Swing Swing Swing Swing Swing
1 2 3 4 5 6
Jazz Dixie- Dixie-

Ballad land1 land2
BOUNCE
BOUNCE
Bounce Bounce Bounce
1 2 3
Reggae Reggae
1 2
SLOW ROCK
SLOW ROCK
Slow Slow Slow
Rock 1 Rock 2 Rock 3
TANGO
TANGO
Tango Tango Tango
1 2 3
LATIN1
LATIN1
Cha- Rhumba Begui-
cha ne
Mambo Salsa
66
Page 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
LATIN2
LATIN2
Samba Samba Samba
1 2 3
Bossa- Bossa- Bossa-

nova1 nova2 nova3
8 BEAT
8 Beat
1
8 Beat
2
8 BEAT
8 Beat
3
8 Beat
4
8 Beat
5
5

Dance Dance Dance Dance
Pop 1 Pop 2 Pop 3 Pop 4
16 BEAT
16 BEAT
16 Beat 16 Beat 16 Beat 16 Beat 16 Beat
1 2 3 4 5
16 Beat 16 Beat 16 Beat

Funk 1 Funk 2 Funk 3
USER RHYTHM
USER RHYTHM
USER USER USER USER A B NOTE:
1 2 3 4
The Baroque on the March page is
USER USER USER USER C D
5 6 7 8 configured with accompaniment only; it
does not contain any drum or percussion.
67
5 Automatic Accompaniment - Auto
Bass Chord (A.B.C.)
The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the Rhythm section
of the Electone to automatically produce chord and bass accompaniment
as you play. It adds an entirely new dimension to your performance by
effectively putting a full backing band at your disposal. Depending on
the feature or mode selected, you can play anything from a single note to
a full chord on the Lower key board and hear complete, rhythmical bass
and chord accompaniment.
1) To select the A.B.C. function (from the Rhythm Condition page):

Choose a rhythm on the panel, then press that rhythmﾕs panel button again (or
5 again press the Data Control button corresponding to the selected rhythm).
Rhythm Condition Page

1 -1 1 -2 2 -1
1 -3 1 -4 2 -2
1 2
1 A.B.C.
1 -1 OFF
Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function.
1 -2 Single Finger Mode
The Single Finger mode provides the fastest and easiest means to obtain
many different chord/bass combinations, by simply using one, or at most,
two or three fingers to play the chords.
1 -3 Fingered Chord Mode
The Fingered Chord mode automatically produces bass and chord
accompaniment for chords played in the Lower keyboard. It allows you to use
a wider range of chord types than in the Single Finger mode. In the Fingered
Chord mode, you play all the notes of the chord while the Auto Bass Chord
function automatically selects the appropriate bass pattern.
1 -4 Custom A.B.C. Mode
The Custom A.B.C. mode is a slight variation on the Fingered Chord
mode. It allows you to determine what bass notes will be played in the
accompaniment by playing a note on the Pedalboard along with the chords
you play in the Lower keyboard.
2 MEM. (Memory)
2 -1 LOWER
Selecting this keeps the chord accompaniment of the Lower Keyboard
voices playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard.
2 -2 PEDAL
Selecting this keeps the bass accompaniment of the Pedalboard voices
playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard.
68
2) To select the A.B.C. function (from the A.B.C./M.O.C. page): VOICE
DISPLAY
EFFECT
SET
A. B. C.
M. O. C.
The Auto Bass Chord page can be called up by pressing the A.B.C./M.O.C.
button in the DISPLAY SELECT section. FOOT
SW.
REGIST. EXP.
SHIFT PITCH/MIDI
The A.B.C. section on this page are the same as the one found in the Rhythm
Condition page. RHYTHM
VOICE PROGRAM

VOICE VOICE (FAST)
DISPLAY SELECT
3) Chords Recognized in the Single Finger Mode

Major, minor, 7th and minor 7th chords can all be played in the Single Finger
mode.
NOTE:
With Single Finger, the chord produced

5

will sound in the same octave regardless
of where it is played on the Lower
G A B D E
keyboard.
F G A B C D E
NOTE:
(Key of C)
PLAYING SINGLE FINGER CHORDS
C
WITHOUT RHYTHM:
Major chords: Press the root of the chord (the note that Auto Bass Chord is generally used with
corresponds to the chordﾕs name). rhythms to create full rhythmic
accompaniment, but it can also be used in
C
the Single Finger mode to add full
continuous chords to your performance
Minor chords: Simultaneously press the root and any one
without the use of the rhythm. Simply
black key to the left of it. leave the rhythm off in Single Finger mode,
and play Single Finger chords from the
C7 Lower keyboard.
7th chords: Simultaneously press the root and any one white
key to the left of it. NOTE:
Minor, 7th and minor 7th chords with

Cm7 black key roots (such as B or G ) are
Minor 7th chords: Simultaneously press the root as well as played in the same way as those with white
any black key and any white key to the left of it. key roots.
4) Chords Recognized in the Fingered Chord Mode

(Key of C)
C Cm C7 Cm7 Cmaj7
NOTE:
If you forget to cancel the Single Finger or

Cm maj7 C+5 C7+5 Cdim C7sus4 Fingered Chord accompaniment
functions, single notes that you play will
be sounded as continuous chords.
Cm7-5 C-5 C7-5 C6 Cm6
69
6 Accompaniment Controls
The Accompaniment function described in this section is independent of
the A.B.C. accompaniment. When rhythms are used, A.B.C. provides
rhythmical chords and bass, while the Accompaniment of this section
provides arpeggiated chords and other instrumental embellishments.
Accompaniment controls include the setting of the Accompaniment type
and its volume. These controls are selected from the Rhythm Menu and
Rhythm Condition pages.
To select and set up the Accompaniment controls:
1
Press any of the RHYTHM buttons once.
NOTE:
RHYTHM
5
VOLUME
To turn the Accompaniment function off, MAX

1
press the Data Control button 1 2 ROCK
corresponding to the currently selected
type. (When off, all types should appear

in normal display.) 3 4
MIN
NOTE:
Rhythm Menu Page
Even if the Accompaniment Type is
changed, the Intro/Ending and Fill In
patterns remain the same.
1
ACCOMPANI. (Accompaniment)
1 Type 1-Type 4
These settings provide various types of rhythmic and melodic
accompaniment, and generally become more complex according to
the type number.
2
Press the same rhythm button again to display the Rhythm Condition
page.
Rhythm Condition Page
NOTE:
When the Electone is turned on, the

Accompaniment Volume is automatically
set to 0. Be sure to set the Accompaniment
Volume to the appropriate value when
using the Accompaniment function.
2
2 Volume
Determines the volume of the Accompaniment. Accompaniment can
also be turned off by setting this parameter to the minimum value.
Range: 0 - 24
70
7 Keyboard Percussion
The Keyboard Percussion function features a total of 120 different drum
and percussion sounds, playable from the keyboards and Pedalboard.
Keyboard Percussion has two different modes, Preset and User. Preset
Keyboard Percussion lets you play 43 different sounds from the Lower
keyboard and Pedalboard, while the User Keyboard Percussion lets you
freely assign the 120 available sounds to any key or pedal you wish. The
two Keyboard Percussion buttons on the panel function as on/off switches
for both Keyboard Percussion modes.
1) To use the Preset Keyboard Percussion:
1
Turn off the Lower and/or Pedal voices by setting each voiceﾕs volume
to MIN.
5

NOTE:
2
Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the LOWER/
1 and/or PEDAL/2 buttons in the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION section Pressing the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION
on the left side of the panel. buttons calls up the Menu display shown
at left. You can select Preset (LK Preset or
KEYBOARD PK Preset) or User (one of the eight Users
PERCUSSION
you created). If one of the Users is
LOWER
currently active, select ﾒLK PRESETﾓ
1 (Lower Keyboard Preset) or ﾒPK PRESETﾓ
(Pedalboard Preset).
PEDAL
2
NOTE:
When the Rhythm Pattern Program

function (page 126) is engaged, different
drum and percussion sounds are available
on the upper keyboard.
3
Set the volume. The volume of the percussion sounds is set together
with that of the rhythm volume.
RHYTHM VOLUME
MAX
1 2 ROCK 1

3 4
MIN
4
Play some notes on the Lower keyboard and/or Pedalboard. The 43
percussion sounds have been assigned to the keyboards as shown in
the chart below.
71
er
ak igh
Sh a H
c
ui Low
C
ca igh
la
p ui
C C oH
d ng ow
an gh Bo o L h
H Hi
ng ig
Preset Percussion Assignments for the Lower Keyboard (43)
o
og ow Bo ga H 1 l1
Ag L w m ba
o on o h To m
og C a L Hig Cy
Preset Percussion Assignments for the Pedalboard (18)
g h.
Ag ig
h on 1 nt st
ra
H C ale Low Sy he
k b 1 rc l1
oc w m
Ti le O ba
Bl L o ba m
d
oo ock m t Cy
Ti ane e al 2 2 h
W Bl as r
t in b m as l1
d ll
1
C bou Cym al 1 To Cr ba
oo be h.
W ow n m ra mb nt m
C pe Ta est Cy Sy 3 Cy
h m de
O rc ra l 1 To Ri
le d O st ba h. pe
n
ng se he m nt
ia lo rc y 1 O
Tr e C O h C al Sy at
l b -h
ng ol
l s
ra m Hi ed
ia R C Cy n os
Tr m e pe Cl 1
ru id 1 at
R at O ed 1
Preset Keyboard Percussion
D rum s m -h Ri
m
e
ar e D i-h lo im To Hi
Sn a r
H tC R t um
a m h 1 Dr
Sn 1 i-h ru ig 2 e t
m H e D L erb ar gh
st
ra To m
ar ru ev
m
Sn Li
To
he 2 Sn e D R vy um 1
rc m
ar rum ea Dr rb
O To 3 e ve
3 Sn e D m H avy m ar Re
m ar ru He To Sn
To Sn re D m t um
Dr y
1 a ru gh e av
ot Sn e D Li vy ar He
Sh l ar um ea Sn
h l Sn Dr H um um
us Ro Dr
Br sh ss um Dr ot
1
ar
e av
y
e Ba Dr ss Sh Sn He
ar Bru ss Ba
Sn e 1
Ba ert us
h
um
ar m Br Dr
Sn To c ll
ss
h. 2 on ar
e Ro
nt m C
Sn
h Ba
Sy . To 3 us
h m Br
nt o ar
e
Sy T
You can rearrange the key assignments of
following User Keyboard Percussion

the drum and percussion sounds using the
h. Sn
nt s
Sy ve
la
C
NOTE:
function.
72
5
2) To use the User Keyboard Percussion
A total of 120 different drum and percussion sounds can be assigned to any
key or pedal, and your original setups can be saved to eight memory locations:
User 1 through User 8. (For this example, use User 1.)
1
Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the LOWER/
1 button in the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION section.
KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION
LOWER
PEDAL
The Menu display appears on the LCD, and indicates that the LK
5
Preset is currently selected. The Menu can be selected from LK (Lower
Keyboard) PRESET and eight Users, USER 1 through USER 8.

When the PEDAL/2 button is used to call up the Menu display:
KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION
LOWER
PEDAL
The Menu can be selected from PK (Pedalboard) PRESET and eight

Users, USER 1 through USER 8.
NOTE:
2
Press one of the Data Control buttons corresponding to USER 1 to
select USER1. See page 77 for the information on ﾒCopyﾓ
function, which will be added to the right
The MENU/ASSIGN page indication appears at the top right corner
side of the display when a User Keyboard
of the display. Percussion is selected.
73
3
Select the ASSIGN page by pressing the Page buttons.
The display will be replaced with the Assign Page:
PAGE
1 2 3
1 INST. (Instrument)
5
Use the Data Control buttons below INST. in the display to page
through the 12 available Instrument categories. (Refer to the User
Keyboard Percussion Categories list below.)
2 Instrument Names
The individual instruments are shown in the display and can be
selected with the appropriate Data Control buttons.
3 CLEAR
This function is used to erase User assignments for User 1. CLEAR
works in two ways: either to erase a single instrument, or to erase all
instruments. (See step #5 below.)
User Keyboard Percussion Categories
Page 1
1.CYMBAL
Crash Crash Crash Ride Ride Ride
Cym1 Cym2 CymM. Cym1 Cym2 CymCup
Orch. Orch. Orch. Cym CymBr Tam-

Cym1 Cym2 CymM. March Shot Tam
Page 2
2.HI-HAT
HH HH HH HH
Open Close Pedal1 Pedal2
Analog Analog
HH O HH C
Page 3
3.SNARE DRUM
SD SD SD Rim SD Rim SD Ac- SD Ac-
Light Heavy 1 2 cent1 cent2
SD Re- SD Re- Synth. Orch. SD Analog

verb1 verb2 SD SD Roll SD
74
Page 4
4.SNARE BRUSH
SD Br SD Br SD Br
Shot1 Shot1 Roll
Page 5
5.TOM
Tom Tom Tom Tom
1 2 3 4
TomBr TomBr TomBr TomBr Synth. Synth. Synth.

Shot1 Shot2 Shot3 Shot4 Tom1 Tom2 Tom3
Page 6
6.BASS DRUM
BD BD BD Synth. BD Con-
Light Heavy Attack BD March cert BD
Analog
BD1
Analog
BD2 5

Page 7
7.CONGA/BONGO
Conga Conga Conga Conga Conga
High Low Slap Muff. Slide
Bongo Bongo Bongo Bongo

High Low Slap Mute
Page 8
8.CUICA/SURDO
Cuica Cuica Cuica Tambo- Tambo-
High Med. Low rimO. rimM.
Surdo Surdo Surdo Surdo

Open Mute Rim Muff.
Page 9
9.TIMBALES/COWBELL
Timba- Timba- Timba- Timba- Timba- Timba-
le1 H. le1 L. le2 H. le2 L. le3 H. le3 L.
Timba- Timba- Cow- Cow- Cow- Cow-

le4 H. le4 L. bell1 bell2 bell3 bell4
Page 10
10.PERCUSSION1
Cabasa Shaker Mara- Mara- Guiro Guiro
cas H. cas L. Short Long
Wood Wood Wood Claves Casta- Vibra-

High Med. Low net slap
Page 11
11.PERCUSSION2
Agogo Agogo Trian- Trian- Wind- Wind-
High Low gleO. gleC. bell1 bell2
Tambou Pan- Bell Hand Finger Scra- Noise

-rine deiro Claps -slap tch Per.
Page 12
12.PERCUSSION3
Kotsu- Kotsu- Kotsu- Kotsu- Ohtsu- Ohtsu-
zumi1 zumi2 zumi3 zumi4 zumi1 zumi2
Taiko Taiko Ohdai- Ohdai- Kake- Kake- Kake-

1 2 ko 1 ko 2 goe1 goe2 goe3
75
4
To assign an instrument to a particular key or pedal:
simultaneously hold down the Data Control button corresponding
to the desired instrument and press the key (or pedal) to which the
instrument is to be assigned.
The newly assigned instrument name and key are shown near the
top of the display.
Upper Keyboard
Lower Keyboard
or
5 Pedalboard
Continue the operation above to build up your own User Keyboard

Percussion set.
5
To erase an instrument/key assignment, use the Clear function. Clear
NOTE:
can be used in two ways: to erase one instrument or all instruments.
Though eight User Keyboard Percussion
setups can be created, they cannot be
memorized to Registration Memory. Only
■ To erase one instrument:
on/off data and the Keyboard Percussion Simultaneously hold down the Data Control button corresponding
Menu are memorized to Registration to CLEAR and press the key (or pedal) corresponding to the
Memory. instrument you wish to erase. (A short ﾒbeepﾓ sound indicates that
the instrument has been erased.)
■ To erase all instruments:
NOTE:
1. Press, then release the Data Control button corresponding to
Two User Keyboard Percussions currently CLEAR. The following display appears, prompting confirmation
selected by LOWER/1 and PEDAL/2 are
of the operation.
playable if both buttons are on.
NOTE:
When creating a User Rhythm pattern, the

instrument assignments are different from
the ones described here. (See page 128
for Rhythm Pattern Program instrument
assignments.)
2. Press any of the Data Control buttons below [Clear] in the display
to erase all data. When [Clear] is selected, a ﾒCompletedﾓ message
momentarily appears on the display. Press any of the Data Control
buttons below [Cancel] in the display to abort the operation.
76
3) Other User Keyboard Percussion Functions
Additional operations in the User Mode include copying of Lower/Pedal Preset
Keyboard Percussion to one of the Users, and copying from one User location
to another. The copy operations here are convenient for creating a basic
foundation over which you can make your own custom Keyboard Percussion
setups, without having to start from scratch.
■ To copy the Lower Preset Keyboard Percussion to one of the Users:

1. Select the MENU page by using the Page buttons.
PAGE
5
COPY/LK PRESET (COPY/PK PRESET)

Copies Lower Preset Keyboard Percussion (Pedal Preset Keyboard
Percussion) to one of the eight Users.
2. With USER 1 selected as the Menu (for this example, use User 1),
press one of the Data Control buttons below ﾒLK PRESETﾓ in the
COPY window. The following display appears, prompting
confirmation of the operation.
3. Press any of the Data Control buttons below [Copy] in the display
to copy the Lower Preset. When [Copy] is selected, a ﾒCompletedﾓ
message momentarily appears on the display. Press any of the
Data Control buttons below [Cancel] in the display to abort the
operation.
The Pedal Preset Keyboard Percussion (PK PRESET) can be copied
in the same way.
77
■ To copy from one User location to the other:
1. Select the MENU page by using the Page buttons.
COPY/USER
Copies one of the eight Users to another.
5 2. With USER 3 selected as the MENU (for this example, use User 3
as the destination and User 1 as the source), press one of the Data
Control buttons below ﾒUSERﾓ in the COPY window. The
following display appears, prompting confirmation of the

operation.
3. Select a User as the copy source (copied from) by pressing the

Data Control buttons corresponding to the marks.
4. Press any of the Data Control buttons below [Copy] in the display
to copy from the source (USER 1) to the destination (USER 3).
When [Copy] is selected, a ﾒCompletedﾓ message momentarily
appears on the display. Press any of the Data Control buttons
below [Cancel] in the display to abort the operation.
78
8 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.)
The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically adds a harmony
part to the melodies you play on the Upper keyboard. The harmony is
derived from the chords you play on the Lower keyboard ﾑ or from the
chords that are played for you, if you use Automatic Accompaniment.
Melody On Chord has three different modes, each providing a different
set of harmonies to accompany the melody played. The modes are selected
from the A.B.C./M.O.C. page.
To select the M.O.C. function:

FOOT REGIST. EXP.
Press the A.B.C./M.O.C. button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.
A.B.C./M.O.C. page VOICE

EDIT
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
PATTERN SEQUENCE 5

VOICE VOICE (FAST)
1 2 5 DISPLAY SELECT
3 4
MELODY ON CHORD
1 OFF
Cancels the Melody On Chord function.
2 Mode 1
Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range close to the melody
played.
3 Mode 2
Produces harmonies of up to three notes in a range close to the melody
played.
4 Mode 3
Produces harmonies of up to four notes in a range relatively distant
from the melody played.
5 KNEE
On/off switch for Knee Lever control over Melody On Chord NOTE:
operation. To use the Melody On Chord function with Knee Lever
control, first switch the Knee setting to ON, then select one of the Melody On Chord applies only when the
Upper keyboard voice sectionﾕs volume is
three modes (described above). When the control is on, pressing the set to the appropriate value.
Knee Lever to the right activates the Melody On Chord function.
79
6 Registration Memory
Registration Memory allows you to store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and LCD, providing
a convenient way to instantly change all voice settings and rhythms while youﾕre playing, with the simple
touch of a single button on the Registration Memory panel. The buttons are conveniently located between the
Upper and Lower keyboards for easy access while playing.
M.
/TO DISK
13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D.
Functions and settings that cannot be memorized are:

･ Reverb type ･ Voice Edit settings (except for User voice numbers
･ Attack mode in Flute Voices currently assigned to the Dotted buttons)
･ Pan, Reverb and Volume settings for the ･ Voice Disk voices
instruments (Drum and percussion sounds) ･ User rhythms in the Rhythm Pattern Program
･ User Keyboard Percussion settings (except for (except for User rhythm numbers currently assigned
User numbers currently assigned to the Lower/ to the Dotted buttons)
Pedal buttons) ･ Rhythm Sequences
･ Registration Shift settings ･ MIDI settings
･ Pitch/Transpose settings ･ Lead Initial Touch setting
6
1 Storing Registrations
Registration Memory
Newly created registrations you make can be stored to the Registration

Memory panel buttons. All registrations in Registration Memory can
also be saved to floppy disk for future recall.
To store registrations to the Registration Memory:
1
After creating your original registration, decide which numbered
button you wish to store.
2
While holding down the M (Memory) button in the Registration
Memory section, press the numbered button to which you wish to
save your registration.
1. While holding down M button... 2. ...Press desired numbered button.
M.
/TO DISK
13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D.
When the registration is stored, the numbered button flashes

momentarily.
2 Selecting Registrations
Simply press the numbered button that corresponds to the registration
you wish to select.
Using the D (Disable) button:

Rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns also change when you
select different Registration Memory buttons. Pressing the D (Disable)
button allows you to keep the same rhythm and accompaniment patterns
throughout all your registration changes, or make your own rhythm
selections if you want to.
80
3 Saving the Registration Data to
Disk
1
Insert a formatted disk into the disk slot under the Music Disk
NOTE:
Recorder (M.D.R.).
Make certain that the disk is either blank or has data you can erase. If See pages 96 and 97 for the details on
the disk is new and unformatted, you will have to format it. Refer to saving/recalling registrations to/from the
M.D.R.
the instructions how to format a disk (page 89).
2
Select a song number on the M.D.R. using the SONG SELECT buttons.
You can also select a song number shown on the display using the
appropriate Data Control button and (if necessary) using Page buttons
NOTE:
No song names will be provided for the

songs recorded by the other Electone
6
to display the appropriate page. A song name is displayed next to the
Registration Memory
models.
song number which already contains data.
RECORD PLAY
SONG FROM TO SONG DEL.

REPEAT SONG COPY
01
PAUSE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD CUSTOM PLAY
– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
NOTE:
There are 40 songs (ten song numbers on the four pages), or memory
You can freely name the songs you have
locations, available on a single disk. recorded. See page 92 for the details.
3
While holding down the RECORD button on the M.D.R., press the
M (Memory) button in Registration Memory.
RECORD PLAY

REPEAT SONG COPY
----
– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
M.
/TO DISK
13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D.
This operation saves all 16 registrations in Registration Memory to

one song. The other 39 available songs on the disk can be used for
saving additional batches of 16 registrations.
81
4 Registration Shift
The Registration Shift function allows you to change registrations, all
the settings you make on the panel and LCD, without taking your hands
from the keyboards. By using the Right Footswitch on the Expression
Pedal, you can ﾒjumpﾓ to a specified registration or step through the
panel registrations in sequence, either in numeric order or in any order
you specify. Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User.
To select the Registration Shift functions:

Press the REGIST. SHIFT button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.
REGIST SHIFT Page

FOOT REGIST. EXP.

6 VOICE
EDIT
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
PATTERN SEQUENCE
1 OFF
1 2 3 4
Registration Memory
Turns off the Registration Shift assignment.

U. FLUTE
VOICE
L. FLUTE TREMOLO
VOICE (FAST) 2 SHIFT
Selects the Shift mode. In the Shift mode, each press of the Right
Footswitch selects the Registration Memory presets in their numerical
DISPLAY SELECT order. After the last preset is reached, the function ﾒwraps aroundﾓ to
select the first preset again. The numbered buttons light up as they are
selected.
■ To set the Shift mode function:
Press any of the Data Control buttons below SHIFT in the
Registration Shift page..
3 JUMP
Selects the Jump mode. In the Jump mode, each press of the Right
Footswitch selects a specified panel registration.
■ To set the Jump mode function:
1. Press any of the Data Control buttons below JUMP in the
Registration Shift page.
The Jump ﾒdestinationﾓ appears at the right side of the LCD.
2. Enter the desired registration number using the Data Control

buttons to select the registration number.
82
4 USER
Selects the User mode. In the User mode, each press of the Right
Footswitch selects registrations according to the order you specify.
■ To set the User mode function:
1. Press any of the Data Control buttons below USER in the
Registration Shift page.
The page information, indicating that the Edit page is available,
appears at the top right section of the LCD.
2. Press any of the Data Control buttons below SHIFT END to

determine how to terminate the registration shift function.
Registration Memory
NOTE:
Always press the PLAY button to start the

songs and activate this function on the
STOP: Selects the last registration and quits the operation. M.D.R. The CUSTOM PLAY button will
not cause to activate the Next Song
TOP: After the last preset is reached, then selects the first preset
function.
again and repeats the operation.
NEXT SONG: After the last preset is reached, then calls up the NOTE:
registration data of the next song. This function is handy for you
to play a song containing more than 16 registrations. Using the Next Song function will not read
the User voices, or the User rhythm
Recording the songs onto the M.D.R. using this function allows patterns/sequences while playing back a
you to play back them successively. rhythm.
3. Press the Page buttons to select the EDIT page.

The Edit page appears.
There are two pages in the User mode: Mode and Edit. S e l e c t
the Edit page to program the desired sequence.
83
EDIT Page
PAGE
NOTE:
1 -1 1 -2 1 -3 1 -4 2 -1 2 -2 2 -3 2 -4
The cursor cannot be moved unless
registration numbers have been entered.
1 2
NOTE: 1 POSITION (Cursor Controls)

Though about 15 Registration Shift steps
The cursor controls are used to move the cursor (the arrow in the
are shown in the display at one time, up display) along the registration row in the display. Entered
to 80 steps can be memorized; use the registration numbers are shown in boxes, while the numbers in
cursor controls to access the undisplayed the row above indicate the number of successive presses of the
steps.
Right Footswitch.
6 NOTE:
The Shift End (see above) mark cannot be

Move the cursor to the point you wish to edit.
1 -1 |<< Moves the cursor to the first position.
1 -2 < Moves the cursor one step to the left.
Registration Memory
moved using the cursor controls.

1 -3 > Moves the cursor one step to the right.
1 -4 >>| Moves the cursor to the last position.
2 DATA (Data Controls)

NOTE: The data controls are used to enter and delete registration numbers
in the registration row. Move the cursor to the desired position
The Shift End mark ( for Top and
for Next Song) will automatically be put and edit the registration data.
at the end of the registrations you entered
when TOP or NEXT SONG is selected as
2 -1 SET
the Shift End on the Mode page. For initially entering a registration number to a blank space in the
registration row, or for replacing a number at the current cursor
position. To enter a number, press the desired Registration
Memory button (the selected button will light), then press the
Shift End mark
Data Control button corresponding to SET. After using SET to
enter registrations, the cursor can be moved among the numbers.
2 -2 INS. (Insert)
For inserting a registration number just before the current cursor
position. The new registration number is inserted at the cursor
position and all other numbers to the right of the cursor are moved
to accommodate the new numbers. To perform the operation,
first move the cursor to a numbered position. Then press the
desired Registration Memory button (the selected button will light),
and press the Data Control button corresponding to INS.
2 -3 DEL. (Delete)
For deleting a registration number at the current cursor position.
To delete the unnecessary number, move the cursor to a numbered
position and press the Data Control button corresponding to DEL.
84
2 -4 CLEAR
For erasing all current user Registration Shift Settings.
After selecting CLEAR, the following display appears:
Clear Cancel
Select [Clear] to clear all data. The message ﾒCompleted!!ﾓ

momentarily appears on the LCD and returns to the previous
display.
Select [Cancel] to abort the operation.
Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the Registration
6
Shift functionﾕs capacity of 80. The following message momentarily
appears when the 80 spaces have been filled:
First delete unnecessary registrations, then perform the operation
again.
Registration Memory
Resetting the Electone to the Factory Preset (Power On Reset)
All current settings including Registration Memories, User voices and
User rhythms can be deleted at once by using the Power On Reset function.
Be careful when using this operation,
To reset the all settings: since it erases all your existing data.
1
Turn off the power. Always save your important data to a
floppy disk using M.D.R. (page 87) in
advance.
2
While holding down the top left Data Control button, turn the
power back on.
POWER
85
Turning the Electone off erases all panel settings you have made. When
the Electone is turned on, Basic Registration 1 is automatically selected.
If you have made panel settings you wish to keep, save them to Registration
Memory before turning the Electone off.
You can, however, restore the panel settings that were made before the
Electone was last turned off. In doing this, first be careful NOT to press
any panel buttons (excepting those in Basic Registration) after you turn
the Electone back on. Then, to restore the previous settings, hold down
the M./TO DISK (Memory) button and press D. (Disable) button.
M.
/TO DISK
13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D.
6
Registration Memory
86
7 Music Disk Recorder
The Music Disk Recorder (M.D.R.) is a sophisticated recording device built into the Electone that lets you
record your performances and registration settings. The Music Disk Recorder not only records the notes you
play; it also remembers the voices and rhythms you select, the front panel controls you change, as well as all
expression pedal, footswitch and knee lever positions, to reproduce your performance exactly as you play it.
Moreover, the M.D.R. lets you play back commercially available XG song data, and allows you to execute song
copy operation even between different disks and disk copy operation which makes it possible to create a
backup disk.
1 Precautions
Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below.
To eject a floppy disk:

Compatible Disk Type
Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that
3.5ﾓ 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used.
the M.D.R. is stopped (check if the LED above
A blank 2HD floppy disk has been included with
the STOP button in the M.D.R. section is lit).
your Electone for you to record your performances.
Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go;
the disk will automatically pop out. When the
Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks disk is fully ejected, carefully remove it by
hand.
■ To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive:
Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward
and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the
Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the
power off during recording, reading and
7
Music Disk Recorder

disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly playing back. Doing so can damage the disk
pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the and possibly the disk drive.
eject button pops out. If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it
is not pressed in as far as it will go, the disk
may not eject properly. The eject button may
become stuck in a half-pressed position with
the disk extending from the drive slot by only a
few millimeters. If this happens, do not
attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk,
since using force in this situation can damage
the disk drive mechanism or the floppy disk.
To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing
Floppy disk slot
the eject button once again, or push the disk
back into the slot and then repeat the eject
procedure.
Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the
LED (Lamp in-use) Eject button
disk drive before turning off the power. A
floppy disk left in the drive for extended
periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that
NOTE:
can cause data read and write errors.
When the EL-900 is turned on, the LED below the floppy
disk slot will be lit indicating that the M.D.R. is ready to
use.
87
Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head ■ To protect your data (Write-protect Tab):
To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide
● Clean the read/write head regularly. This the diskﾕs write-protect tab to the ﾒprotectﾓ position (tab
instrument employs a precision magnetic read/ open). If you attempt to modify the disk when the write-
write head which, after an extended period of use, protect tab is set to ﾒonﾓ position, ﾒProt (Protected)ﾓ
will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the will appear on the LED display in the M.D.R. section
disks used that will eventually cause read and write indicating that the operation is not possible.
errors.
Protect Off
● To maintain the disk drive in optimum working (tab closed: unlocked)
order Yamaha recommends that you use a

commercially-available dry-type head cleaning disk Rear side
to clean the head about once a month. Ask your
Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper Shutter
head-cleaning disks.
Protect On
NOTE: Write-protect tab
(tab open: locked)
Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk

drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive ■ Data backup
or floppy disks. For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that
you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy
About the Floppy Disks disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or
damaged. To make a backup disk use the Disk Copy
7 ■ To handle floppy disks with care:

Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or
function on page 106.
apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always

Music Disk Recorder
keep floppy disks in their protective cases when Improved Potentiality of the M.D.R.
they are not in use. Different from the existing models, the M.D.R. of
Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, the EL-900 begins reading all data starting with the
extremely high or low temperatures, or song numbered 1 as soon as you insert a disk into
excessive humidity, dust or liquids. the floppy disk slot. Thus, inserting a disk causes
to produce a sound (reading sound) indicating that
Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the the M.D.R. is in the reading process.
exposed surface of the floppy disk inside.
The improvement of the M.D.R. allows you to start
Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such song playback immediately, to be free from the
as those produced by televisions, speakers, reading sound during playback and to record the
motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially song playback using the several song numbers with
or completely erase data on the disk, rendering the Next Song function.
it unreadable.
Never use a floppy disk with a deformed NOTE:
shutter or housing.
Ejecting the disk will lose the data loaded from the disk except
Do not attach anything other than the provided for the currently selected and played back song.
labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that
labels are attached in the proper location. NOTE:
The time reading sound is produced is in proportion to the

amount of data recorded in the disk. You can eject the disk
whenever you are not using the M.D.R. and donﾕt want to be
bothered with the reading sound.
88
2 Formatting a Disk
Before recording a performance to your blank disk, the disk
must first be formatted.
To format a disk:
1
RECORD PLAY
Put the disk, label facing up, into the disk drive (floppy UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
disk slot).
ﾒFortﾓ will appear on the LED display indicating that the REPEAT SONG COPY
inserted disk requires to be formatted.

– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
2
RECORD PLAY
While holding down the SHIFT button, press the UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
FORMAT button.
This step puts the format operation on stand-by, indicated REPEAT SONG COPY
by the dashes on the LED display and the flashing LED ----
above the FORMAT button.

– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
3
Press the FORMAT button again to begin formatting.
7
The LED above the FORMAT button stays lit. The number
ﾒ160ﾓ appears on the LED display and counts down to If you format a disk that contains previously recorded
ﾒ001ﾓ as the disk is being formatted. When formatting is data, all data on the disk will be erased. To avoid
inadvertently formatting a disk before this step, press
Music Disk Recorder

completed, operation returns to the original STOP status. the STOP button.
The following Song Name display appears after the
RECORD PLAY
operation. UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

REPEAT SONG COPY
160
– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
The song numbers to be displayed at one time are 10.

The page numbers, from 1 through 4, are also shown at
the top right side of the display. A total of 40 song locations
are created. The song names next to each song number
are left blank and indicate that each song number doesnﾕt
contain any data.
Selecting UTIL./Change Name allows you to change the
song name you have recorded. See page 92 for the details.
About SHIFT button:

You will find the SHIFT button (printed in green) at the top
right side of the M.D.R. section. Some buttons in the M.D.R.
section have dual functions: the first function is printed in
white above each button; the second function is printed in
green below each button. The SHIFT button is used to select
the second functions by pressing each function button while
holding down the SHIFT.
89
3 Recording
1) To record a song: NOTE:
1
Set the desired registrations on the Electone. The song numbers 01 through 40 are available and up to
Make all the Electone settings necessary for the song you 40 songs can be stored on a disk. However, available
will record. This means entering the all registrations you song numbers may be reduced depending on the amount
of the song data you have recorded. See page 108 for the
will need for the entire performance in the Registration information about the total amount of memory left on a
Memory. Make sure also to select the registration that floppy disk.
you will use at the beginning of the song.
2
Put a formatted disk into the disk slot.
RECORD PLAY
Use the SONG SELECT (˝, Ó) buttons to select the
3
song number for recording. You can also select the song
number by pressing the Data Control buttons. REPEAT SONG COPY
01
– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
7
Music Disk Recorder
RECORD PLAY
4
Press the RECORD button. UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
The RECORD lamp lights up and the PLAY and CUSTOM SONG FROM TO SONG DEL.
REPEAT SONG COPY
PLAY lamps begins blinking, indicating that the Music
Disk Recorder is ready to record.
01
– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
NOTE:
If the selected song number already contains recorded

data, small bars (ﾒ--ﾓ) appear at the left part of LED display
and flash along with the song number, warning you that
the selected song number already contains recorded data.
If you want to execute recording operation over the song
number, press the RECORD button again. If you donﾕt
want, select another song number for recording or press
the STOP button to cancel recording.
5
RECORD PLAY
Press the PLAY button. UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
The PLAY lamp lights up and small bars flash across the
LED display from left to right, indicating that the M.D.R. REPEAT SONG COPY
is reading the registrations and other settings. --

– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
90
6
After numbers appear on the LED display of the M.D.R., UPPER
RECORD
LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER
PLAY
PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
begin playing.
Once the setup operation in step #5 is complete, a number SONG
REPEAT
FROM TO
SONG COPY
SONG DEL.
will appear on the LED display indicating that you can 622
begin recording your performance. The number also
indicates the amount of memory left on the disk. MUSIC DISK RECORDER
– TEMPO + FORMAT
NOTE:
The short time it takes to set up for recording is recorded

as well, causing a short pause before playback of the song.
If you make a mistake during recording:

RECORD PLAY
1. Press the PLAY button while the M.D.R. is still running. UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
This stops the recording and returns you to the starting

point of the song. SONG
REPEAT
FROM TO
SONG COPY
SONG DEL.
The letters ﾒrEﾓ (retry) appear on the left side of the LED
display and the PLAY and CUSTOM PLAY LEDs start PAUSE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD CUSTOM PLAY
flashing, indicating that you can re-record the song.

– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
2. Press PLAY again to begin re-recording the song.
Re-recording starts from the beginning of the song and
replaces the previously recorded performance with the
newly recorded performance.
7
Music Disk Recorder

RECORD PLAY
7
When you finish playing, press the STOP button. UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
After the small bars flash to draw a square on the LED

display to indicate the processing for stop, both the REPEAT SONG COPY
RECORD and PLAY lamps go out, and recording is PAUSE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD CUSTOM PLAY
stopped.
– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
Never eject the floppy disk before the STOP lamp lights
up.
NOTE:
When the available memory reaches ﾒ008ﾓ or less, the

numbers begin flashing to warn you. If this happens,
stop recording before the display reaches ﾒ000.ﾓ
8
To hear your newly recorded performance, press the PLAY
button.
Play back will begin after a couple of seconds. For more Never attempt to press the eject button or turn the
information on playback and other playback-related power off during recording, reading and playing
functions, see page 98. back. Doing so can damage the disk and possibly
the disk drive. Be sure to remove the floppy disk
from the disk drive before turning off the power.
91
Changing the Song Name
1. Press the top right Data Control button in the Song Name
display.
Edit Song Name display appears, prompting you to edit
the song name.
1 1 : Moves the cursor one step to the left.
2 : Selects the letter, number or symbol
at the current cursor position.
3 q : Moves the cursor one step to the right.
NOTE:
Pressing 1 (3 ) while holding down the COARSE

button moves the cursor to the far left (the far right).
1 2 3 Pressing 2 while holding down the COARSE button
jumps to the top of each character group, upper case
2. Select the letter, number or symbol you want to use by letters, lower case letters, numbers and symbols.
pressing the Data Control buttons corresponding to 2.

3. Press 3 (or 1) to move the cursor to the position at which Available Letters, Numbers and Symbols
you want to enter the letter, number or symbol. A B C D E F GH I J K L M N O P Q R S
T U VW X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l
4. Repeats the above steps 2. and 3. to complete your song m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , -
7
name. Up to seventeen characters can be entered.
. / : ; < = > ?@ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~
5. After finished, select [Set] to determine the name. * Pressing 2 while holding down the COARSE button
jumps to the top of each character group (the
Music Disk Recorder
characters in the double-squares).
Outline of M.D.R. Operation

Though the M.D.R. is as easy to operate as a cassette tape recorder, it is far move versatile. Since it records all
Electone settings and control movements as well as the notes you play as digital data, it allows you much more
flexibility and control than even the most sophisticated tape recorder. Basically, the M.D.R. independently
records the following three types of data:
1. Registration data (including Bulk data)

All registrations stored to the Registration Memory numbered buttons as well as the registration currently set to
the panel, are recorded at the beginning of a song, before the actual recording of your performance. Bulk data is
also saved to the song with the Registration data. Bulk data includes: Registration Shift settings, Rhythm Pattern
(User rhythms) and Rhythm Sequence data, and User voices.
2. Performance data
The M.D.R. records your performance on the keyboards and pedalboard of the Electone exactly as you play it,
even recording the strength at which you play the keys and how hard you press them down while playing. The
various types of performance dataﾑUpper, Lower, Pedal and Leadﾑare recorded to independent ﾒtracks,ﾓ so
that you can change any one of them without affecting the others.
3. Control data
All changes you make on the Electone during your performance are recorded in real time. These include registration
changes, the use of the expression pedals, footswitches and knee lever.
92
2) To record each part separately:
You can also record the parts of your performance independently;
for example, first recording the chords and bass to the song (using
the Lower and Pedalboard), and after that recording the melody
(using the Upper Keyboard). This function also lets you record
keyboard percussion and performance control data, such as
registration changes and expression pedal operation, separately
from the other parts of the song. Even Keyboard Percussion and
Lead Voice 1 voices can be recorded separately, though, the Lead
Voice 2 voices will be included in the performance data of the
Upper Keyboard.
1
Set up the M.D.R. for recording, as you did in the section
above.
The first steps in recording parts separately are the same
as for normal recording on page 90:
1. Memorize all the registrations needed for your
performance to the Registration Memory numbered
buttons, and set the registration that will be used at
the beginning of the song.
2. Insert a formatted disk.
3. Select the song number to which you will record your
performance. 7
4. Press the RECORD button to make the Music Disk
Music Disk Recorder

Recorder ready to record.
2
RECORD PLAY
Select the parts for recording. UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
Pressing the RECORD in the procedure 1.-4 above turns

on the all partsﾕ LEDs in the upper left row indicating SONG
REPEAT
FROM TO
SONG COPY
SONG DEL.
that each part is ready to record. 01

Press the RECORD buttons for each part in the upper
left row to turn off the parts you donﾕt want to record. MUSIC DISK RECORDER
– TEMPO + FORMAT
For this example, press RECORD/UPPER. The PLAY/

UPPER lamp in the upper right row lights up.
■ RECORD/UPPER - Records the performance data of

the Upper keyboard when turned on.
■ RECORD/LOWER - Records the performance data of
the Lower keyboard when turned on.
■ RECORD/PEDAL - Records the performance data of
the Pedalboard when turned on.
■ RECORD/CONTROL - Records the Control data (see
Outline of M.D.R. Operation in the previous page) when
turned on.
The LED lamps above the buttons indicate the record
status of the parts.
This example operation disables recording of the Upper
part.
93
Separate recording for Lead Voice 1 and/or Keyboard Percussion parts:
RECORD PLAY
Hold down the SHIFT button and simultaneously press the SHIFT
appropriate button in the top row in the procedure #2. above.

The two buttons (indicated in the illustration at the right) (LEAD) (K.PERC.) (LEAD) (K.PERC.)
function as Lead Voice 1 and Keyboard Percussion selectors in 01

PAUSE
the record mode.
REM.MEM.
RECORD/LEAD - Records the performance data of the
Lead Voice 1 voice when turned on.
RECORD/K.PERC. - Records the performance data of
NOTE:
Keyboard Percussion when turned on. (Keyboard
Percussion can be recorded and played independent of If you donﾕt record the Lead Voice 1 and Keyboard
the Rhythm patterns.) Percussion parts separately, the Lead part will be
recorded as the Upper data and the Keyboard
Holding down the SHIFT button in the record condition lets Percussion part will be recorded as the Lower/Pedal
data.
you select these ﾒhiddenﾓ functions. The lamps above each
button will also change to indicate the status of SHIFT-selected
parts.
3
Press the PLAY button, and start playing after numbers
appear in the display.
For this example, play the lower keyboard and pedalboard.
7
4
Press the STOP button when you are finished with your
performance to stop recording. Now that youﾕve recorded
Music Disk Recorder
the first parts of your performance.
5
RECORD PLAY
Press the RECORD button to set up recording of the next UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
part.
In this case, the song (number) contains the performance REPEAT SONG COPY
data of the Lower and Pedal in addition to the registration --01

and setup data. The small bars (ﾒ--ﾓ) appear at the left
part of LED display and flash along with the song number, MUSIC DISK RECORDER
– TEMPO + FORMAT
warning you that the selected song number already

contains recorded data.
RECORD PLAY
6
Press the RECORD button again to record another part. UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
(Upper part.)
The RECORD lamp lights up and the PLAY and CUSTOM REPEAT SONG COPY
PLAY lamps begins blinking, indicating that the Music 01

Disk Recorder is ready to record.

– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
RECORD PLAY
7
Press the RECORD buttons for each part in the upper left UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
row to turn off the parts you have already recorded. In

this case, press RECORD/LOWER, RECORD/PEDAL and REPEAT SONG COPY
RECORD/CONTROL to turn off. 01

– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
94
8
Press the CUSTOM PLAY button to start recording of UPPER
RECORD
LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER
PLAY
LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
the new part or parts. (Upper part.)

Playback of the previously recorded parts starts SONG
REPEAT
FROM TO
SONG COPY
SONG DEL.
immediately. 610
The CUSTOM PLAY button is used here to record only
the parts that have been selected for recording, and play MUSIC DISK RECORDER
– TEMPO + FORMAT
back only those parts that have been selected for playback.
Since registration data has already been recorded with
the first parts of the song, recording begins immediately. NOTE:
While you listen to the parts being played back, start
The CUSTOM PLAY button is used to record or play
playing the melody on the Upper keyboard. back the parts and data other than the registration data.
When the end of the recorded performance is reached,
playback is automatically stopped and the STOP status NOTE:
is resumed.
The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed
the length of the previously recorded parts. If you want
to change the song length, first delete the existing song
(see Song Delete on page 106) and record again.
Punch-in Recording
You can retry to change a specific part which you donﾕt want
to use. 7
To execute the Punch-in recording:
Music Disk Recorder

1. Press the PLAY button to start playback of the song which
contains the part you want to change.
2. Press the PAUSE button at the point you want to execute
punch-in recording.
3. Press the RECORD button. The PLAY and CUSTOM PLAY
lamps begins blinking, indicating that the Music Disk
Recorder is ready to record.
4. Press the RECORD buttons for each part in the upper left
row to turn off the parts you want to keep as they are. (Only
the part you want to do punch-in recording should be turned
on.)
5. Press the PLAY button to start punch-in recording. Play the
specified range you want to change.
6. Press the STOP button to quit the Punch-in recording
function as soon as you reach the end of the range.
95
4 Recording Registrations
(and Bulk Data)
You can also record registrations by themselves, without
recording a performance. Bulk data, including Registration
Memory and Registration Shift settings, Rhythm Pattern (User
rhythms) and Rhythm Sequence data, and User voices, are
also saved in the operation. There are two ways to record the
registrations and bulk data:
[1] To record only the registrations and bulk data:
1
On the Electone, set the registrations and all other data
you want to record.
2
Select the song number to which you wish to record the
registrations.
3
While holding down the RECORD button, press the M./ UPPER
RECORD
LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER
PLAY
PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
TO DISK (Memory) button on the Registration Memory

panel. Small bars flash across the LED display from left SONG
REPEAT
FROM TO
SONG COPY
SONG DEL.
to right, indicating that the M.D.R. is reading the ----
7 registrations and other settings. After recording, the PAUSE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD CUSTOM PLAY
M.D.R. is automatically stopped and returns to STOP – TEMPO + FORMAT

MUSIC DISK RECORDER
status.
Music Disk Recorder
1. While holding down the RECORD button...
2. Press the M./TO DISK (Memory) button.
M.
/TO DISK
13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D.
[2] To record only the registrations and bulk data:
1
Set up the registrations and select the song number as
you did in steps #1 and #2 above.
RECORD PLAY
2
Press the RECORD button to make the M.D.R. ready to UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
record. SONG FROM TO SONG DEL.

REPEAT SONG COPY
01
– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
RECORD PLAY
3
Press the PLAY button to record the registrations, then UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
press the STOP button as soon as you see the small bars
flash across the LED display from left to right. REPEAT SONG COPY
The small bars that flash across the display indicate that --
the M.D.R. is recording the registrations and being set up

for normal recording; pressing the STOP button interrupts MUSIC DISK RECORDER
– TEMPO + FORMAT
this process.
96
5 Recalling Recorded
Registrations (and Bulk Data)
The registrations (and bulk data) recorded to song numbers
in the above operation can be loaded back to the Electone by
simply selecting the appropriate song number and pressing
the PLAY button. When the operation has been completed,
the M.D.R. returns to STOP status.
The M.D.R. also makes it possible to use more than the 16

Registration Memory registrations in a performanceﾑwithout
having to alter the current panel settings. This would come
in handy when performing several songs in succession that
use more than 16 registrations.
To do this:
1
First record the registrations you need into several
song numbers on the M.D.R. before the performance.
(You should also try to record them in the order that
youﾕll use them, if possible.)
2
During the performance, after all 16 registrations from
a certain song number have been used, select the next
song number and press the PLAY button on the
M.D.R. This replaces all 16 registrations in
7
Music Disk Recorder

Registration Memory with the new ones from the
selected song number. NOTE:
Selecting the Next Song in the User Registration Shift
3
By repeating the above steps, you can run through an settings makes it possible to have the M.D.R.
entire performance without having to change the panel automatically read the 16 registrations in the next song
settings. number. See page 83 for more information.
6 Replacing Registrations
The M.D.R. also lets you change the registrations of an existing
song without changing the performance data.
The procedure is the same as that of Recording Registrations
mentioned in the previous page.
97
7 Playback
You can play back your recorded performance by simply
pressing the PLAY button. Registrations and other data will
be recalled to the Electone.
RECORD PLAY
1) To play back a song:

1
REPEAT SONG COPY
Select the number of the song you want to play back by
03
using the SONG SELECT buttons. You can also select PAUSE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD CUSTOM PLAY
the song by pressing the Data Control buttons.

– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
2
RECORD PLAY
Press the PLAY button. UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
The PLAY lamp lights up and small bars move across the
display, indicating that the M.D.R. is resetting registrations REPEAT SONG COPY
on the Electone. ---

– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
RECORD PLAY
3
Playback of the song begins after the Electone data is reset UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
7 and the song time is shown on the M.D.R.ﾕs display.

Playback automatically stops at the end of a song. You
SONG
REPEAT
FROM TO
SONG COPY
0 0:0 5
SONG DEL.
can, however, stop playback in the middle of a song by PAUSE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD CUSTOM PLAY
Music Disk Recorder
pressing the STOP button.

– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
If you have recorded the Lead Voice 1/Keyboard Percussion part separately:
On the EL-900 the Lead/Keyboard Percussion part(s) you have NOTE:
recorded separately will automatically be on when you start
playback. When you play back the data which is made by other
Electone models such as EL-90/87 and which includes
the separately recorded Lead/Keyboard Percussion
part(s), Lead part will be off and Keyboard Percussion
will be on as the defaults. (To turn on the Lead part,
press UPPER/PLAY while holding down the SHIFT.)
2) To play back the selected part(s):

You can also play back the selected parts of your recorded
performance, while other parts are temporarily turned off. This Never turn off the power switch when a floppy disk is
function is especially useful for playing a single part, such as the still engaged in the M.D.R. disk slot. Also do not press
melody, over previously recorded accompaniment parts. the Eject button during recording or playback.
To select specific parts for playback:
1
Select the number of the song to be played back.
RECORD PLAY
2
Set the parts you wish to mute to off, by pressing the UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
appropriate PLAY button in the upper right row. The SONG FROM TO SONG DEL.
REPEAT SONG COPY
LED of the selected part should be off.
Make sure to turn on the parts you wish to play back.
03
– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
98
3
Press the PLAY button.
First the registration and other data are read, then playback
of the performance starts (excepting the parts that were
turned off in step #2).
4
Now perform your new part or parts over the playback
parts.
When the end of the recorded performance is reached,
playback is automatically stopped and the STOP status is
resumed.
3) To repeat playback of a song or songs:

This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all songs on RECORD PLAY
a disk or only one specific song. UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
1
REPEAT SONG COPY
Select the song number you wish to play back.
01
If you wish to play back all songs on a disk, select the first PAUSE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD CUSTOM PLAY
song that will be played back. The others will follow in

– TEMPO + FORMAT
order. MUSIC DISK RECORDER
RECORD PLAY
2
Hold down the SHIFT button and simultaneously press UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
the SONG REPEAT button. SONG FROM TO SONG DEL.
7
REPEAT SONG COPY
The lamps above SHIFT and SONG REPEAT light up,
and ﾒALLﾓ appears on the LED display. PAUSE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD CUSTOM PLAY
Music Disk Recorder

– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
3
To repeatedly playback all songs starting with the
selected song:
Press the PLAY button.
Playback will begin from the song selected and repeat
indefinitely. To stop playback, press the STOP button.
RECORD PLAY
3
To repeatedly play back only the selected song: UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
1. Again hold down the SHIFT button and REPEAT SONG COPY
simultaneously press the SONG REPEAT button. PAUSE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD CUSTOM PLAY
ﾒSinGﾓ appears on the LED display to indicate that

a single song will be repeatedly played back. MUSIC DISK RECORDER
– TEMPO + FORMAT
RECORD PLAY
2. Press the PLAY button to begin playback of the song. UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
Playback will begin from the song selected and repeat SONG FROM TO SONG DEL.
REPEAT SONG COPY
indefinitely. To stop playback, press the STOP

0001
button. PAUSE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD CUSTOM PLAY
– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
99
About XG
The EL-900 allows you to play back the commercially available
XG song data using the M.D.R. Also, the XG Easy Convertor
function of the EL-900 lets you convert the data created by
the EL-900 to the XG compatible data.
Playing back the XG Song Data

This function is only for playback. You can practice a specific
part of the XG song data by muting the part..
To play back XG song data:

1. Insert the XG song disk into the floppy disk slot.
The following display appears.
1 Selects a song.
2 Selects a part. Range: 1 - 16, ALL (all
parts)
2-1 Moves the cursor one step to the
left.
2-2 Moves the cursor one step to the
right.
7 1 3
2 -1 2
4 5
2 -2
3 SOLO: Brings the part at the cursor
position to solo playback status. The
solo playback part is indicated by a
Music Disk Recorder
[XG] page will be added to the upper right side of the display.
square ( ). All other parts will be
The XG song data will be displayed in the XG page. You can
muted automatically.
store both the XG songs (on the XG page) and Electone songs
(on pages 1 - 4) in a single disk. 4 MUTE: Brings the part at the cursor
position to muted status. The muted
parts are indicated by a hyphen (-).
2. Use the Data Control buttons 1 to select a song which you 5 VOL. (VOLUME): Adjusts the volume
want to play back. of each part within a range, 0 - 24. If
you have selected ALL, you can adjust
3. Press the PLAY button in the M.D.R. section to start
overall volume.
songplayback.
Use 2 button to select a part, and press 3 to engage the
solo playback of the selected part, press 4 to mute some
parts or press 5 buttons to adjust the volume of a specific
part.
100
XG Easy Convertor
This function allows you to convert the EL-900 song data to
the XG format data. You can then play back the data using
XG devices and/or personal computer. Depending on the type
of XG devices, sound may be different from the original data
you have created.
The contents to be converted:
Voice (Program) number, Volume, Feet (octave settings), Pan, Vibrato,
Slide (for the Lead voices), Initial Touch, Horizontal Touch, Pitch Bend,
Effects (Tremolo and Delay), Reverb (except for Length), Sustain, Rhythm
Patterns (except for Accompaniment), Expression, Registration, Registration
Shift (except for Next Song)
To convert the EL-900 data to the XG song data:

NOTE:
1. Insert the disk containing the Electone data into the floppy
Confirm that the disk should contain enough amount
disk slot. of available memory before trying to convert.
2. Select the song to be converted to the XG data.
3. While holding down the bottom right Data Control button
(nothing is displayed in the corresponding section of the
LCD diplay) press the RECORD button in the M.D.R. section.
The following message appears to confirm the operation.
RECORD PLAY
SONG
REPEAT
FROM TO
SONG COPY
SONG DEL.
7
Music Disk Recorder

– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
4. Press the Data Control buttons corresponding to [Confirm].

The M.D.R. starts playback of the selected song for you to
decide whether you convert it to the XG data, or not.
After finishing playback the following message appears.
NOTE:
In this case the M.D.R. uses the XG tone generator

built in the EL-900.
5. Press the Data Control buttons corresponding to [Convert]. NOTE:

After the process of the conversion the LCD returns to the
Select [Cancel] to abort the operation and return to
original display. the original display. Select [Edit Name] to jump to
the Edit Song Name display (page 92). You can name
the XG song using up to eight letters.
NOTE:
The converted XG song data may be heard differently

from the original data.
When the XG song data is newly created in the disk, XG
page will be added to the top right side of the display. The
NOTE:
converted song (XG data) will be stored on the XG page and
the original song (Electone data) is left as is. The converted data cannot be deleted.
101
8 Other Functions
1) Custom Play
RECORD PLAY
If you want to play back the song without resetting the registrations UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
and other data, press the CUSTOM PLAY button. This displays
the song time and starts playback immediately. REPEAT SONG COPY
0000
– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
NOTE:
If you hold down the SHIFT and press CUSTOM PLAY

or if you execute the following Read and Auto Increment
function, all data, except for that of Rhythm Pattern
Program, Rhythm Sequence, User voices, Keyboard
Percussion assignments and Instrument (rhythm)
settings, will be loaded and played back.
2) Read and Auto Increment

Another method for calling up only registration data, besides that
7
mentioned in the Note above, is to press the UPPER button in the 01
RECORD section while the M.D.R. is in the Stop status. This
Read and Auto Increment function automatically calls up the
registration data and selects the next song number.
Music Disk Recorder
NOTE:
This function is not possible if the next song contains no

registration data.
RECORD PLAY
3) Pause UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
If you want to temporarily stop playback of the song or songs, REPEAT SONG COPY
press the PAUSE button. To resume playback from the point at 110
which the song was paused, press the PAUSE button again.
– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
4) Fast Forward and Fast Reverse

During playback, these buttons function as fast forward and fast NOTE:
reverse buttons, much like those of a tape recorder. Press Ó to
advance to a later point in the song or press ˝ to return to an It may take some time to search the point at which you
want to resume playback when you return to an earlier
earlier position. While either of these buttons is held down,
position using the fast reverse function.
playback stops and the song time is advanced or reversed
accordingly. Hold down the button until the desired song time is
NOTE:
shown. When the button is released, playback is paused. To
resume playback from the point youﾕve advanced or reversed to, Fast Forward and Fast Reverse operate at five times the
press the PLAY button. normal playback speed.
102
5) Changing the Tempo
You can change the tempo of the song as the song is playing on RECORD PLAY
the M.D.R. by holding down the SHIFT button and pressing the
TEMPO + or TEMPO - button. (The Tempo dial on the Electone SONG FROM TO SONG DEL.
REPEAT SONG COPY
panel cannot be used to change the tempo on the Music Disk

Recorder.) PAUSE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD CUSTOM PLAY
Each press of the button slows down or speeds up the tempo by a

small amount. Changing the tempo does not change the pitch of MUSIC DISK RECORDER
– TEMPO + FORMAT
the music.
To restore the original recording tempo of a song, hold down the
SHIFT button and simultaneously press both TEMPO buttons. NOTE:
When tempo is changed, the LED display indicates the

change as a percentage of the original recorded tempo
(100). Values less than 100 indicate a slower tempo;
values greater than 100 indicate a faster tempo.
Indicates faster tempo
RECORD PLAY

REPEAT SONG COPY
Indicates original tempo
– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
Indicates slower tempo

7
NOTE:
Music Disk Recorder

Tempo changes remain in effect even through changes
in song number. If you have changed the tempo in one
song, you should perform the above step to restore the
original tempo before playing another song. Turning
the power switch off and on again also restores the
original tempo.
103
6) Song Copy
This function lets you copy the data recorded at one song number NOTE:
to another song number. You can copy and exchange the data
even between two different disks. This function is available with the Electone data, not with
the XG data.
To use the Song Copy function within a disk:
RECORD PLAY
1
Select the song number to be copied (source) with the UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
SONG SELECT buttons. SONG FROM TO SONG DEL.

REPEAT SONG COPY
01--
2
While holding down the SHIFT button, press the SONG
– TEMPO + FORMAT
COPY FROM button. MUSIC DISK RECORDER
The song number to be copied from appears at the left of

the LED display. NOTE:
If the specified song number has no recorded data, the

M.D.R. automatically searches for and selects the next
song that contains recorded data.
3
RECORD PLAY
While holding down the SHIFT button, press the SONG UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
COPY TO button.
The M.D.R. automatically searches for an empty song REPEAT SONG COPY
number to copy the data to, and displays that number at 0102
7
the right side of the display. The RECORD lamp will
start flashing indicating that the M.D.R. is ready to copy. MUSIC DISK RECORDER
– TEMPO + FORMAT
If all songs numbers contain recorded data, ﾒFULLﾓ

Music Disk Recorder
appears on the LED display. In this case, you should erase NOTE:
one of the songs on the disk by using the Song Delete
The message ﾒFULLﾓ may appear when the available memory
function (page 106).
is short.
NOTE:
If you want to abort the operation, press STOP button.
4
Use the SONG SELECT buttons to select a destination
song number for copying.
Follow this step if you wish to select a different destination
song number than the one displayed. The M.D.R. will
display only those song numbers that have no data.
RECORD PLAY
5
Press the RECORD button to execute the Song Copy UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
function.
The RECORD lamp stops flashing and remains lit, REPEAT SONG COPY
indicating that the Song Copy function is in process. 016

The LED display shows the ﾒsizeﾓ of the song in numbers,

and counts down as the data is being copied. When the MUSIC DISK RECORDER
– TEMPO + FORMAT
display shows ﾒ000,ﾓ the song has been completely copied.
104
To use the Song Copy function between two different disks:
1
Insert the source disk that contains the song you want to
copy to.
2
RECORD PLAY
COPY FROM button.

The song number to be copied from appears at the left of REPEAT SONG COPY
the LED display. 01--

– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
3
Select the song number to be copied (source) with the
NOTE:
SONG SELECT buttons.
You can also use the Data Control buttons to select the
song number.
RECORD PLAY
4
Press the RECORD button. UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
The RECORD lamp lights up and the LED continues to

indicate ﾒ00.--ﾓ as shown at the right. REPEAT SONG COPY
00--
– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
7
5
Press the Eject button to take out the source disk.
NOTE:
Music Disk Recorder

Although ejecting the disk while the RECORD lamp is
lit is prohibited, you are allowed to eject the disk in this
case.
6
Insert the destination disk to which you want to copy .
7
RECORD PLAY
COPY TO button.
The M.D.R. automatically searches for an empty song SONG
REPEAT
FROM TO
SONG COPY
SONG DEL.
number to copy the data to, and displays that number at 0102
the right side of the display.
– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
8
Use the SONG SELECT buttons to select a destination
song number for copying.
9
Press the RECORD button to execute the Song Copy NOTE:
function.
The LED display shows the ﾒsizeﾓ of the song in numbers, The asterisk (*) is added to the end of the (destination)
songﾕs name to differentiate from the original (source)
and counts down as the data is being copied. When the song.
display shows ﾒ000,ﾓ the song has been completely copied.
105
7) Song Delete
You can delete a song on disk by performing this function.
To use Song Delete:
1
Use the SONG SELECT buttons to select the number of
the song you wish to delete.
2
RECORD PLAY
DEL. button.
REPEAT SONG COPY
The letters ﾒdLﾓ appear on the left side of the LED display, dL04
next to the selected song number. RECORD lamp flashes PAUSE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD CUSTOM PLAY
to indicate that the M.D.R. is ready to delete the song. If – TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
you wish to, you can still select a different song number
in this step by using the SONG SELECT buttons.
NOTE:
If you want to abort the operation, press STOP button.
NOTE:
XG song data cannot be deleted.
7 3
Press the RECORD button to execute the Song Delete
function.
The RECORD lamp stops flashing and remains lit,
Music Disk Recorder
indicating that the Song Delete function has begun.

When the Song Delete function is completed, the STOP
status is automatically resumed.
8) Disk Copy
You can duplicate a floppy disk by copying the contents. Yamaha
recommends that you keep two copies of important data on
separate floppy disks by using this function. The disk type of both source disk and destination disk
must be the same. For example, use 2DD for the disk to
be copied (destination) if the source disk is 2DD type.
1
Prepare the source disk and the formatted blank disk to
be copied.
Be sure to set the Write-protect tab on the source disk to

ON. On the contrary, set the Write-protect tab on the
destination disk to OFF. The message ﾒProtﾓ may appear
if you insert the destination disk with the Write-protect
tab ON. In this case, the Disk Copy function cannot be
executed.
2
RECORD PLAY
While holding down the SHIFT button, press the LOWER UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
button in the RECORD part.

ﾒIn 1ﾓ appears on the LED display to indicate that the REPEAT SONG COPY
M.D.R. is ready to execute the Disk Copy. In 1

– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
106
RECORD PLAY
3
Insert the source disk into the disk slot. UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
The M.D.R. starts reading the data in the source disk.

ﾒout 1ﾓ appears on the LED display. REPEAT SONG COPY
– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
RECORD PLAY
4
Press the eject button to take out the source disk. UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
ﾒIn 2ﾓ appears on the LED display to urge you to insert SONG FROM TO SONG DEL.
REPEAT SONG COPY
the destination disk.
In 2
– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
RECORD PLAY
5
Insert the destination disk. UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT
The number ﾒ160ﾓ appears on the LED display and

counting down is initiated as the disk is being copied. REPEAT SONG COPY
160
When finished, ﾒEndﾓ will appear on the LCD display for

two or three seconds. MUSIC DISK RECORDER
– TEMPO + FORMAT
RECORD PLAY
SONG
REPEAT
FROM TO
SONG COPY
End
SONG DEL.
7
Music Disk Recorder

– TEMPO + FORMAT
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
NOTE:
ﾒFortﾓ or ﾒbAdﾓ may appear if an error occur in the

middle of the operation. If this happen, please retry
formatting the destination disk and copying disk.
Follow the M.D.R. direction to eject/insert the disks

during the operation. Do not eject/insert the disks
frivolously ignoring the M.D.R. direction. Doing so can
damage the disk and possibly the disk drive.
107
9) Checking the Remaining Memory
RECORD PLAY
While playback is stopped, you can check the amount of memory SHIFT
available for additional recording in your disk. To do this,

(LEAD) (K.PERC.) (LEAD) (K.PERC.)
simultaneously hold down the SHIFT button and the PAUSE
button (indicated in the illustration at right as REM. MEM.: 540
PAUSE
Remaining Memory). The maximum amount of memory is ca.700

for 2DD disks and ca.1400 for 2HD disks. REM. MEM.
10) Voice Disks and Pattern Disks

The M.D.R. also allows you to select voices and rhythms from
disks. For more information about Voice Disks, see page 118; for
more on Pattern Disks, see page 143.
11) Copy Protect

Some of the Disks available for the Electone are purposely protected
from being copied or erased. You cannot save the data to another
floppy disk. If you try to load data from such a ﾒcopy-protectedﾓ
disk to the Electone, a ﾒProtected Diskﾓ (PrXX*) message will
appear on the LED display. The data cannot be saved to the disk.
7
Music Disk Recorder
108
Messages on the M.D.R. LED Display
Display Description of the Messages
No disk is installed. Install a disk.
1) The installed disk is write-protected, so the Record, Song Copy, and Song Delete jobs cannot be performed. Set
the diskﾕs Write-protect tab (page 88) to OFF.
2) If you are using a copy-protected playback-only disk, this message may appear when you attempt the Record,
Song Copy, or Song Delete operations.
3) When executing Disk Copy, set the Write-protect tab on the source disk to ON.
The installed disk is not formatted. Format the disk. (page 89)
1) The diskﾕs memory capacity is full, so the Record or Song Copy operation cannot be performed. Use another
formatted disk.
2) Data is already recorded at all song numbers, so the Song Copy operation cannot be performed. Press the STOP
button, then delete any unnecessary songs.
None of the song numbers contain recorded data, so the Song Copy operation cannot be performed. Press the
STOP button.
An error occurred because the disk was removed during recording or playback. Press the STOP button, and
replace the disk, then start the operation over again.
The installed disk cannot be played back on the M.D.R. Press the STOP button, then insert a compatible disk.
Recording cannot be performed because too much data was received at once. Press the STOP button.
The disk is defective and cannot be formatted. Press the STOP button, then insert another disk.
An error occurred during the transmission or reception of data. Press the STOP button.
You are trying to record to the song number which already contains recorded data. Select the other blank song
number by pressing the SONG SELECT buttons.
7
Music Disk Recorder

* ﾒXXﾓ indicates a song number (01 through 40).
When you insert the ﾒcopy-protectedﾓ disk to the Electone, this message will appear on the LED display. You
cannot overwrite or save the changes.
In the case of Voice Disk operation, an incompatible Voice Disk has been inserted.
An under line (_) before the song number indicates that it is XG song data.
You have inserted a wrong type disk as the destination disk in the Disk Copy operation. Use the same type disk as
(or ) the source disk.
109
8 Voice Edit
The EL-900 Electone has a Voice Edit feature that allows you to create your own voices (except for the VA
voices). The Voice Edit uses sophisticated sound shaping tools that make it possible to craft just about any kind
of soundﾑfrom authentic recreations of acoustic instruments to wild electronic voices and special effects.
The following section will introduce you to the basics of voice editing by taking you step by step through a
specific editing example. As you follow the steps, you may find many of the terms and parameter names to be
unfamiliar. Once you go through the editing steps, however, we suggest that you read through the Voice
Editing Basics section (page 119) to get a firmer understanding of the principles behind voice editing.
1 Editing a Voice
1) To select a voice and its Operator:
1
NOTE:
First, select the voice you want to edit from the Voice Menu. (Each
volume on the other voice sections should be set to MIN.)
Only the AWM Voice Menu voices can be
edited with the Voice Edit controls. The
2
VA voices from the Lead Voice 2 section While holding down the VOICE EDIT button in the DISPLAY SELECT
cannot be edited. Also, the Flute voices
section, press the Voice button corresponding to the voice you wish
have their own editing controls and cannot
be edited here. to edit. For this example, select Piano1 from the UPPER KEYBOARD
VOICE 1 section.
VOICE
DISPLAY
EFFECT
SET
A. B. C.
M. O. C.
1. While holding down VOICE EDIT button...
If you press VOICE EDIT without selecting a voice, the following
display will prompt you to complete the step.
FOOT REGIST. EXP.
8
RHYTHM
VOICE PROGRAM
Voice Edit
U. FLUTE
VOICE
L. FLUTE TREMOLO
VOICE (FAST) 2. ...press desired Voice button.
After you have selected a voiceﾑPiano 1, in this exampleﾑthe
following LCD will appear.
DISPLAY SELECT
BRILLIANT MAX
NET PHONE NICA

PHONE
MELLOW MIN
110
EDIT Page
Name of the voice to be edited Operator
NOTE:
The currently selected Operator name is

shown in the dark bar in the middle of the
display.
Algorithm Envelope Parameters
At the left side of the display is the Algorithm used for this voice. NOTE:
An algorithm is a kind of ﾒmapﾓ that shows how the sound
The Algorithm type used is different
components of the voice are related to each other. Each voice depending on the voices.
has nine separate sound components and they are called
ﾒOperators,ﾓ AWM Operator and FM Operators 1 through 8.
3
Begin changing the sound by turning off all Operators, except Operator 1.
To turn off each Operator:

1. First, use the pair of Data Control buttons just below the algorithm
display (below the box 1; the second from the left) to select an
Operator.
The currently selected Operator number is surrounded by the
ﾒBrackets.ﾓ
Pressing the A button move the ﾒBracketsﾓ counter clockwise,
and pressing the B button move the ﾒBracketsﾓ clockwise. Move
the ﾒBracketsﾓ to the Operator 2.
8
2. Then press one of the far left pair of Data Control buttons to turn
Voice Edit
the selected Operator off.
NOTE:
Reverse display (dark box)
indicates that the Operator is The “Brackets” indicate the
Although the Operators 5 through 8 are
on; normal display indicates currently selected Operator.
not shown in the same display, you can
the Operator is off.
show them by moving the ﾒBracketsﾓ to
the AWM operator or past the FM
operator 4.
These buttons turn the These buttons select the

selected Operator on and off. Operators in order.
3. Repeat the above process for all of the Operators except Operator 1.
As you turn off each Operator, play the voice and listen to how
the sound changes.
111
2) To edit the FM Operators:
1
Adjust the Envelope Parameters of Operator 1 (after turning off the
other Operators).
The Envelope Parameters control the level of the sound and how
that level changes over time. See page 122 for more information.
For now, try making some of these changes in the envelope:

Adjust the OL (Output Level) parameter.
Envelope
Parameters
Changing the OL parameter affects the volume of the selected

NOTE:
Operator.
Raise the OL parameter from 0 to 110 by using the pair of Data Control
The parameter value can be changed buttons just below the OL. (Pressing the A button raises the level,
quickly when you press the Data Control
and pressing the B button lowers the level.)
button with the COARSE button held.
8 Adjust the AR (Attack Rate) parameter.

Voice Edit
Play the voice and notice how the changes you make affect the initial
volume of the voice. By changing this parameter you can make the
sound gradually get louder (lower settings) or have it reach its full
volume all at once (higher settings).
112
Adjust the RR (Release Rate) parameter.
Play a note on the keyboard and then release it. Notice how the
changes affect the tail end of the sound, just after you release the key.
By changing this parameter, you can make the sound sustain beyond
the release point (lower settings).
2
Keeping Operator 1 on, select and turn on Operator 2, then adjust
the Operator level.
Adjust the OL (Output Level) parameter.
Use the Data Control buttons below OL (Output Level) to change NOTE:
8
the level of Operator 2. Notice that the volume of the sound doesnﾕt
Voice Edit
Raising the OL of the Operator 2 to make
change, but the tone does. Increasing the level of one of the top row
the sound brighter and lowering the AR
Operators generally makes the tone of the Operator below it brighter of the Operator 2 can produce a distinctive
or more metallic. Decreasing the level has the opposite effect. effect.
3
Turn off Operators 1 and 2, and turn on Operators 3 and 4.
Make some changes to their parameters, as you did with Operators 1
and 2 in steps #1 and #2 above. Set the OL of the Operator 3 to 110.
About the Operators NOTE:

Changing the level of one of the top row Operators (2 and 4 here) affects
No sound will be produced nor will
the tone of the Operator below it. adjusting the top row Operators have any
Changing the level of one of the bottom row Operators (1 and 3) affects the effect if all of the bottom row Operators
volume of the related top row Operator. have been turned off or set to their
minimum level. Be sure to turn on the
bottom row of Operators and set them to
a suitable level before changing the
parameters of the top row Operators.
113
3) To edit the AWM Operator:
Next, weﾕll make some changes in the sound of the AWM Operator. The
AWM Operator is a specially recorded waveform with an actual instrumental
sound, unlike the pure electronic sounds of the other Operators. Before you
actually change it, try listening to this sound on its own, with the other eight
Operators turned off.
1
Turn off all of the Operators, except for the AWM Operator.
The AWM Operator has its own page with a different group of settings.
The AWM Operator display appears as soon as the AWM Operator
has been selected.
2
Adjust the LOW setting, and listen to how they affect the sound.
Changing this parameter affects the lower range of the keyboard.
Raising this parameter boosts the output of the lower range.
8
Voice Edit
3
Adjust the HIGH setting, and listen to how they affect the sound.
NOTE:
The higher setting results in a more pronounced and brighter sound
LOW and HIGH are the equalizers in the higher range of the keyboard.
exclusive to the AWM sounds.
Volume
LOW HIGH
+ +
– –
Frequency
4
Finally, turn all of the other Operators back on and adjust each
Operatorﾕs level.
114
NOTE:
The Operator on/off settings you made

here are temporary. Even though you turn
off an Operator when editing a voice, the
on/off status of the Operators will forcibly
be changed and saved as ﾒonﾓ in a User
voice.
If you want an Operator muted, set the OL
parameter of the selected Operator to the
minimum.
You have got the full-bodied ringing electronic piano sounds.
NOTE:
After making changes in the voice, you can

restore the original voice by switching to
another function. If, however, you wish
to keep the newly created voice for future
use, you should save it. (See following
section.)
2 Saving Your New Voice

Once you have created a sound you are satisfied with, youﾕll want to
save that sound for future use.
To save your newly created voice: NOTE:
1
Use the Page buttons to select the SAVE page. The on/off status cannot be saved. If you
The following display appears. want an Operator muted, set the OL
parameter of the selected Operator to the
SAVE Page
minimum.
8
PAGE
Voice Edit
2
Press the Data Control button that corresponds to the User voice
number you wish to save to.
The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the

operation. (Saving a new voice automatically erases the voice
previously stored to the selected User number.)
115
3
(If necessary) Press the Data Control buttons below [Edit Name] to
give a name to the voice you have edited.
The method to edit the name is the same as the one for the song name
in the M.D.R. section, See page 92 for more information. Up to 16
characters can be used in this case.
4
Press any of the Data Control buttons below [Save] to save the voice,
or press any of the buttons below [Cancel] to abort the operation.
This operation automatically erases any
voice that had been previously saved to
the selected User voice number. You
should check the User voices (page 31)
before saving a voice to make sure that you
will not be erasing any important voices.
8 When the voice has been saved, the message ﾒCompleted!!ﾓ

temporarily appears.
Voice Edit
This Save page shows the same voices as the last page (USER) of the
dotted buttonsﾕ Voice Menu.
116
3 Quitting Voice Edit
You can quit the Voice Edit function from any of its display pages.
To quit:
1
Press the VOICE EDIT button in the DISPLAY SELECT section once VOICE
DISPLAY
EFFECT
SET
A. B. C.
M. O. C.
again.
FOOT REGIST. EXP.

RHYTHM
VOICE PROGRAM
2
Select [Exit] to quit the Voice Edit function, or [Cancel] to abort the U. FLUTE
VOICE
L. FLUTE TREMOLO
VOICE (FAST)
operation and return to the previous display.
DISPLAY SELECT
4 Recalling an Edited Voice

Once the voice has been saved, it can be selected from the last page
(USER) of the dotted buttonsﾕ Voice Menu (page 31).
8
To recall a User voice:
1
Press one of the dotted buttons in the voice section you want to use.
Voice Edit
2
Use Page buttons to select the USER page.
PAGE
3
Press the Data Control button corresponding to the saved voice.
117
5 Selecting Voices From a Voice
Disk (Optional)
You can also load voices from optional Voice Disks to the 16 User voices
in the Voice Menu.
NOTE: To do this:
1
The EL-900 can read the data from the EL-90/ Hold down the VOICE EDIT button in the DISPLAY SELECT section
87 Voice Disk. and simultaneously press any one of the panel voice buttons.
NOTE:
2
Select the VOICE DISK page with the Page buttons.
Any one of the voice sections can be used
The message ﾒInsert Voice Disk!!ﾓ appears and prompts you the
here. Make sure that the volumes of all
other voices are set to off (the minimum operation.
PAGE
value).
3
Insert the Voice Disk into the disk slot under the Music Disk Recorder.
The voice number and name of the Voice Disk appears.
VOICE DISK Page
8
Voice Edit
Pressing these buttons steps through the voice

numbers; the name of each voice appears on
the display as well. Refer to the list included
with your Voice Disk for voice numbers and
names.
4
Using any of the Data Control button pairs, select the voice you wish
to load.
5
Play the keyboard to check the sound of the voice. Select other voices
(as you did in step #4 above) and check those sounds as well.
6
If you want to save the current voice to a User Voice space, select the
previous page, ﾒSAVEﾓ with the Page buttons.
PAGE
7
Press the Data Control button that corresponds to the User Voice
number you wish to save to.
Press one of the four Data Control buttons below [Save] in the display
to save the voice, or one of the four buttons below [Cancel] to abort
the operation and return to the previous display.
When the voice has been saved, a ﾒcompleted!!ﾓ message appears.
118
6 Voice Editing Basics
The EL-900 Electone uses a versatile tone generation system developed
by Yamaha that is capable of producing an exceptionally wide range of
voices. To be more specific, the system uses individual sound sources
that ﾒmodulateﾓ each otherﾕs frequencies and thus create complex sounds
not possible by the ordinary mixing of those sound sources.
1) Operators
There are two types of Operators: the one is the sophisticated AWM Operators
that are the backbone of the Electoneﾕs authentic voices, the other is called
FM Operators. An FM Operator is a sound generator that produces one very
simple type of sound: a pure sine wave. A sine wave by itself is not very
interesting to listen to; however, when one sine wave is used to modulate a
second sine wave, together they result in a new, complex waveform.
AWM Operators FM Operator Structure of the Operators
AWM FM Operators FM Operators

1~4 5~8
Sampling Modulator Carrier
2) Modulators, Carriers and Algorithms

The top Operator, which sends the modulation signal is, not surprisingly,
called the modulator. The bottom Operator, which receives or ﾒcarriesﾓ the
8
modulated sine wave and outputs the resulting sound, is called the carrier.
Voice Edit
The complexity or brightness of the sound depends on the output level of the
modulator.
This kind of arrangement in which Operators are ﾒstackedﾓ together is called
an algorithm. With eight sine wave Operators available for stacking, the various
algorithms can produce a wide variety of sounds.
Voice Algorithm Examples

Modulators Modulator
Modulators
Carriers
Carriers
Carrier
119
3) AWM Operators
Each algorithm has a special AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) Operator.
AWM Operators are not sine waves like the other Operators, but are digital
recordings of actual instrument sounds, such as piano, violin, guitar, and so
on. The AWM Operatorﾕs sound is mixed with the sounds of the other
Operators in the algorithm to create realistic voices.
AWM Operator
NOTE:
Some voices may not have remarkable

effect using these AWM parameters.
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 OL (Output Level)
Determines the level of the AWM sound.
Range: 0-127
2 AR (Attack Rate)
Determines how quickly the Operator will reach its maximum level
after the key is played. Lower values produce a slower attack.
Range: -64 - +63
8 3 DR (Decay Rate)
Determines how much time it takes for the Operator to reach its
second level.
Voice Edit
Range: -64 - +63

4 RR (Release Rate)
Determines how much time it takes for the level to reach 0 after the
key is released.
Range: -64 - +63
5 LOW
Determines to boost or decrease the output of the lower range of the
keyboard.
Range: -64 - +63
6 HIGH
Determines to boost or decrease the output of the higher range of the
keyboard.
Range: -64 - +63
120
4) FM Operators
The Operators 1 through 8 are the sine wave Operators of the algorithm.
When one of these Operators has been selected, the following parameters are
displayed:
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 OL (Output Level)
Determines the level of the selected Operatorﾕs sound.
Range: 0 - 127
2 AR (Attack Rate)
Determines how quickly the Operator will reach its maximum level
after the key is played. Lower values produce a slower attack.
Range: 0 - 31
3 D1R (Decay 1 Rate)
Determines how much time it takes for the Operator to reach its
second level, set in the Decay 1 Level parameter.
Range: 0 - 31
4 D1L (Decay 1 Level)
Determines the second level setting of the Operator.
NOTE:
Range: 0 - 63
5 D2R (Decay 2 Rate)
When the D2R is set to 0, the level set by
the D1L will be maintained until the key
8
Determines how much time it takes for the Operator to reach its is released.
Voice Edit
third level, or the minimum level before the key is released. The higher setting of the D2R rapidly
Range: 0 - 31 lower the level.
6 RR (Release Rate)
Determines how much time it takes for the level to reach 0 after the NOTE:
key is released. With the RR set too low, the sound
Range: 0 - 63 continues to sound.
121
Envelope Parameters
By using the modulators and setting them to various output levels, you
can create all kinds of sounds. These sounds will be static, however,
unless you have the output levels change in time. That is precisely what
an envelope does. It varies the output of an Operator in time so that you
can vary the tone or the level. If the output of the modulator changes, the
tone will change. If the output level of the carrier changes, the volume
will change.
2 3 5 6
AR D1R D2R RR
1
OUTPUT
LEVEL 4
D1L
Key on Key off
Feedback
The output of a modulator can also be circled back to its input, allowing
it to modulate itself as well as the Operator below it. This is called feedback,
and it adds harmonic complexity to the tone. Operators using feedback
are indicated by a line that encircles the right side of the Operator.
Feedback cannot be directly controlled; however, you can adjust the
parameters of Operators that have feedback to change the characteristics
8 of the feedback sound.

Voice Edit
122
5) General Guidelines for Editing Operators
Before you edit a voice, always check its algorithm to see which Operators
function as carriers and which as modulators. Then select each Operator in
turn and edit its parameters. The Output Level and envelope parameters
function differently depending on whether they belong to a carrier or a
modulator. The following list illustrates the relationships between the
Operators and parameters:
1 To change the overall volume: Change 1 of the carrier. Change 7 of the AWM.
2 To change the overall tone: Change 1 of the modulator. Change ! or @ of the AWM.
3 To change how the volume varies over time: Change 2, 3 or 5 of the carrier. Change 8 or 9 of the AWM.
4 To change how the tone varies over time: Change 2, 3 or 5 of the modulator.
5 To raise the volume: Raise 1 of the carrier. Raise 7 of the AWM.
6 To lower the volume: Lower 1 of the carrier. Lower 7 of the AWM.
7 To make the sound brighter: Raise 1 of the modulator. Raise @ of the AWM.
8 To make the sound softer: Lower 1 of the modulator. Lower @ of the AWM.
9 To get faster attack: Raise 2 of the carrier and modulator. Raise 8 of the AWM.
10 To get slower attack: Lower 2 of the carrier and modulator. Lower 8 of the AWM.
11 To reduce the sound rapidly: Raise 3 and 5 of the carrier and modulator. Raise 9 of the AWM.
12 To reduce the sound slowly: Lower 3 and 5 of the carrier and modulator. Lower 9 of the AWM.
13 To get no or shorter sustain: Raise 6 of the carrier and modulator. Raise ) of the AWM.
14 To get longer sustain: Lower 6 of the carrier and modulator. Lower ) of the AWM.
15 To change the timbre rapidly: Raise 2 of the modulator.
16 To change the timbre slowly: Lower 2 of the modulator. 8
Voice Edit
FM Carrier/Modulator
1 2 3 4 5 6
AWM
7 8 9 ) ! @
123
6) Some Voice Editing Examples
The following examples illustrate some specific uses of the Voice Edit controls.
Make the changes as described in the examples, then go on to explore some other
voices on your own, making changes as you like.
■ Ex. 1: Emphasizing the attack of the ﾒBanjoﾓ voice

This voice is composed mainly of the AWM sampled sound, with the other
Operators providing the noise attack sound, simulating the picking of the string.
Try changing the sound of the attack by increasing the Output Level (OL) of
Operator 1.
■ Ex. 2: Adding ﾒbiteﾓ to the ﾒJazz Organ1ﾓ voice (ORGAN Voice Menu)
Operator 1 provides the 16' footage sound, Operator 2 the 8', and Operator 3
the 5-1/3'.
You can make the sound warmer by decreasing the Output Level of Operator 2.
Increasing the Output Level of Operator 3 makes for a rougher edge or more
ﾒbiteﾓ in the organ sound.
■ Ex. 3: Adding the 5th pitch to the Synth. Lead 5 to create suspended 4th.
Operator 1 is set with the 4th pitch while Operator 5 with the 5th pitch and
currently muted. Set the Output Level of Operator 5 from 0 to 90.
■ Ex. 4: Changing the ﾒTrumpet5ﾓ voice to a funny trumpet

Not all the Operators are used to create a voice. Replace the active Operators
with the inactive Operator.
8 You can get a funny trumpet by decreasing the OL of the Operators 1 and 3 to
0 and increasing the OL of the AWM to the maximum.
Voice Edit
■ Ex. 5: Creating an electronic piano sounds suitable to use as the backings

for the ballad from ﾒE.Piano1.ﾓ
Increasing the OL of the AWM from 0 to 124 to layer the AWM sounds to the
FM sounds.
124
9 Rhythm Pattern Program and
Rhythm Sequence Program
The Electone also includes powerful Rhythm Program functions: the Rhythm Pattern Program and the Rhythm
Sequence Program. The Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to record your own original rhythms using the
120 different high-quality percussion sounds of the Electone. The Rhythm Sequence Program lets you connect
your original rhythms together with the Preset rhythms to create complete rhythm tracks, which you can
automatically play back during your performance.
Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation

The following is a brief outline of the steps necessary in programming your own rhythms and rhythm sequences.
Rhythm Pattern Program

RHYTHM
PROGRAM
PATTERN SEQUENCE
Press the PATTERN button to call up the Rhythm Pattern Program and
select the BEAT/QUANTIZE page.
Make Beat, Quantize, and Metronome settings.
Step Write Real Time Write
Select the EDIT page to record percussion sounds and program the
pattern. Up to 16 tracks can be used to enter each percussion
instrument sound.
(Optional) Select the Accompaniment page to determine which

accompaniment pattern will be used with your newly created rhythm, or to
9
create your own backings for the rhythm using the Lower Rhythmic function.
Rhythm Pattern Program and Rhythm Sequence Program

Save your new rhythm to memory in the SAVE page.
Rhythm Sequence Program
Press the SEQUENCE button to call up the Rhythm Sequence Program RHYTHM
PROGRAM
for connecting rhythms together in sequence to create songs. PATTERN SEQUENCE
Save your new rhythm sequence buttons. (No actual saving procedure is
necessary since the rhythm sequences you program will automatically
be saved to the selected Sequence button.)
(Optional) Finally, save all the User rhythm data you‘ve created in the
above steps to disk.
125
1 Rhythm Pattern Program
The Rhythm Pattern Program lets you use any of 120 different instruments
(percussion sounds) assigned to each key on the Upper and Lower
keyboards in creating your own rhythms. Up to 16 separate rhythm
ﾒtracksﾓ are provided in a single pattern for each instrument part, and
up to 40 patternsﾑeight User numbers, each with five variationsﾑcan
be memorized.
1) Entering Rhythm Pattern Program
To call up the Rhythm Pattern Program function :
1
Press and hold down the PATTERN button in the DISPLAY SELECT
section. The LED of the button lights and the display prompts you to
select a rhythm.
NOTE: DISPLAY SET M. O. C.
Pressing the PATTERN button here also

automatically stops the rhythms and
FOOT REGIST. EXP.
rhythm sequences. SW. SHIFT PITCH/MIDI
NOTE: RHYTHM
PROGRAM
VOICE
Use of the playback and recording

functions on the Music Disk Recorder
automatically cancels the Rhythm
Programming/Rhythm Sequencing VOICE VOICE (FAST)
operations.
DISPLAY SELECT
9
There are two ways to program a User pattern: copying a preset rhythm
which is similar to the rhythm you want to create and creating your
own rhythm from scratch.
126
2
2.-1 To copy a preset rhythm:
NOTE:
While holding down the PATTERN button, select a preset rhythm to
be copied to the Rhythm Pattern Program. The User rhythm you have created can also
Copying a preset rhythm lets you make changes to an existing rhythm, be copied to the Rhythm Pattern Program.
You can edit it again and improve it.
saving you time if you want to program a rhythm that is similar to an
existing preset pattern. Two measures of the selected rhythm will be
copied to the Rhythm Pattern Program. NOTE:
In this case, you need to select a specific rhythm from the Rhythm When preset rhythms are copied to the
Menu beforehand. Rhythm Pattern Program, the copied
patterns may differ in volume from the
original patterns.
Copying the Fill Ins and Endings:
The similar procedure can be used with the FILL IN and INTRO. NOTE:
ENDING buttons for copying Fill In and Ending patterns. Select
the rhythm to which the desired Fill In or Ending belongs Some Ending patterns consists of more
than two measures. If you copy such a
beforehand. Then press the FILL IN or INTRO. ENDING button
pattern, only the first two measures can
while holding down the PATTERN button. be copied but the rest cannot be copied.
NOTE:
The Intro. patterns cannot be copied.
2.-2 To create your own rhythm from scratch

Pressing the PATTERN button, and releasing it without selecting a
rhythm loads a blank pattern to the Rhythm Pattern Program.
9
127
Some of the instruments such as Tom
1, 2 and 3 on the Upper and Lower
h
ig er
keyboards are the same.

H
3 ak igh
le ow Sh a H
ba 3 L c
m h ui Low
Ti ale Hig C
ca igh
NOTE:
b 2
ig
h m
Ti le ow la
p ui
H C C oH
4 ba 2 L ion d ng ow
le ow m
Ti ale us
s an gh Bo o L h
ba 4 L c H Hi
m b
m er o ng ig
Ti ale um Ti e P og ow Bo ga H
b
m ed
i
oi
s Ag o L on o h
w
Ti M N tch og C a L Hig
k g
oc or
t ra Ag ig
h on 1
Bl Sh Sc a C ale Low
as ide H
The total of 120 different instruments are available for the Rhythm Pattern
Programming and are divided into two instrument sets: Normal and Extend, and
assigned to each key on the Upper and Lower keyboards, as shown in the following
d k b 1
oo ui
ro g ab Sl oc m
Ti ale
W G on
C a g ap ut
e Bl Low b
2) Percussion Sounds Used for Rhythm Pattern Program
L on l d d m t
ro C a S ffle al M oo ock Ti ane e al 2
ui g u b W Bl t in b
G 2 on m 1 as r
be
ll C ga M Cy h oo
d
be
ll C bou Cym al 1
c m ra mb
ow 3 on ra ar W ow n
C ell C st M hot C pe Ta est Cy
b he r h
ow 4 rc fo S O rc ra l 1
O al ush ute le d O est ba
C ell b r M ng se h m
b ym B l ia lo rc Cy l 1
ow C bal ba Tr C O a
C m 2 le l sh b
ap ym Cy al ng ol ra ym
Sl C
sh m u
b p Tr
ia R C C
e pe
n
o ra y C m
Consists of 91 different drum and percussion instruments.
ng te ru id
C h C bal D rum R at O ed 1
Bo Mu s l)
1 e s
i-h Clo Rim
ra m 2 ar D
o C Cy al eda 2 e H
ng e b Sn ar at m ht 1
Bo 1 id m (P l) Sn 1 i-h ru ig
m R Cy ed eda m H e D L erb
To s ra To m
e
id lo (P 1 st ar ru ev
2 R t C ed ent he 2 Sn e D R vy
m a s c rc m
ar rum ea
To i-h lo c t2 O To
3 H t C A en 3 Sn e D m H avy
m a m c m
To i-h ru c To ar ru He
H eD mA 2 Sn re D m t
ar ru Rim b 2 a ru gh
Assigned to the Upper Keyboard (47)
Assigned to the Lower Keyboard (47)

4 1
m Sn re D m ver ot Sn e D Li vy
To a ru e Sh l ar um ea
2 Sn e D m R um h l Sn Dr H um
ot ar ru Dr h us Ro ss um Dr
Sh Br sh
Sn e D re arc e Ba Dr ss
us
h
ar na r M ar Bru ss Ba
Br ot
1
Sn h. S fo ck) Sn e 1
Ba ert
ar m
ar
e Sh 2 nt um tta Sn To
on m
c
Sn h Sy Dr (A m h. 2 C -Ta
us ot nt m
Br Sh ss um ru Sy . To 3 m ll 1
m sh t 3 Ba Dr s D h Ta be
To u ho ss as nt om d
Br S Sy T in ll 2
m sh Ba h. B h. W be
To B ru 4 nt nt s in
d
ot Sy Sy ve W
m Sh la
To h C
Normal Set
s
us ap ap
Br sl
sn ra
m er b
To ng Vi
Fi
chart..
128
9
9
129
The instruments marked with the
underlines are exclusive to the
Some of the instruments such as
Tom 1, 2 and 3 on the Upper and
Lower keyboards are the same.
en
er Op
ak im te
Sh or Mu
b
Extend(ed) Set.
NOTE:
m im
Ta or n
b
ro m pe
ei Ta o O
on nd rd im
si Pa igh
us H Su o R fled
rc
as rd uf
Pe ac Low Su o M e
se ar rd ut
oi M cas Su o M
N tch
ra a ll rd
ar
Sc M Be Su
m
iu
ed
M e
2 ca in
ll ui ur
be C bo
ow m
C Ta
l1
ba
ym n
C
sh pe
ra O d
C at se
i-h lo
H tC
og i-ha
Consists of 29 different drum and percussion instruments.
al
An g Ho t
1 1 al gh
m m An Li
To To m rum
ru
2 2 D re D vy
m m e
To To ar na ea
3 3 Sn g S m H avy
m m o
To To al ru He 2
i1 An re D m um
4 a ru Dr 1
um Sn e D ss m
m uz i 2
Assigned to the Upper Keyboard (13)
Assigned to the Lower Keyboard (16)

To ts m ar Ba ru
Ko uzu i 3 Sn og ss D
ts m al Ba
Ko uzu 4 An og
1 ts mi 1 al
e Ko zu 1 m An
go u
ts mi To
ke 2 Ko uzu 2 h. 2
Ka oe i nt m
g
ke 3
s
ht m Sy . To 3
O uzu h
Ka goe s nt om
ke ht Sy . T
O 1 h
Ka 1 o
ik nt
ko Ta 2 Sy
ai o
Extend(ed) Set
hd ik
O
2 Ta
ko
ai
hd
O
3) Step Write and Real Time Write
There are two different methods you can use to program rhythms: Step Write
and Real Time Write.
Step Write allows you to enter percussion sounds as individual note values.
As a method, it is very similar to writing down the notes on a sheet of music
paper; each note is entered one at a time, and though you can hear each
individual note entered, you cannot actually hear the pattern playing as you
create it.
Real Time Write on the other hand, is similar to using a multitrack tape
recorder; you can hear previously recorded parts of the pattern as you record
new parts on top.
Each method has its own advantages and uses. Step Write is good for precision
and for entering percussion sounds whose note placement and rhythmic value
has been determined, such as a bass drum that plays every beat in a measure.
Real Time Write is best for capturing the ﾒfeelﾓ of a rhythm, because it allows
you to actually play the pattern as you are creating it. Which method you use
depends partly on the type of rhythm you intend to create and partly on your
own personal preference. You can even switch between the two methods in
editing to create a single rhythm by the use of both methods. This would
come in handy, for example, in programming the basic beats of a rhythm with
Step Write, then using Real Time Write to add percussion accents and
embellishments.
4) Selecting Step Write or Real Time Write Operation

Step Write and Real Time Write can be selected from either the BEAT/
QUANTIZE page or the EDIT page. Which mode of operation is selected
depends on the play status of the rhythm. If the rhythm is stopped, Step
Write is automatically selected. If the rhythm is playing, Real Time Write is
selected. Simply press the START button in the Rhythm section on the panel
to start or stop the rhythm and switch between the two modes.
9 SYNCHRO
START
START
5) Setting the Beat/Quantize Values

The BEAT/QUANTIZE page is automatically displayed when calling up the
Rhythm Pattern Program. It is used in both Step Write and Real Time Write
for selecting the basic timing settings of the pattern.
130
BEAT/QUANTIZE PageﾑStep Write
1 2 3 4
1 BEAT
Determines the time signature used for the rhythm. Available time
signatures are 2/4, 3/4 and 4/4. The 4/4 time is the default setting NOTE:
when a blank pattern has been selected. Beat can only be changed in Real Time
2 QUANTIZE Write when the rhythm is stopped.
Determines the resolution of the Step Write function. Step Write
operations involve advancing in ﾒstepsﾓ along regularly spaced points
in a measure and Quantize lets you set how many points there will be
in the measure. The default setting is a quarter note.
In Real Time Write, this function is generally the same as that in Step
Write operation. Used with Real Time Write, however, it allows you
to automatically ﾒcorrectﾓ the timing of the notes you enter, according
to the specified Quantize resolution.
3 ASSIGN (NORMAL/EXTEND)
NOTE:
Selects the instrument set you want to use. Two types are available:
NORMAL: 91 different instruments are assigned to the Upper and Refer to page 128 for the instrument
assignments of each set.
Lower keyboards.
EXTEND: 29 different instruments are assigned to the Upper and
Lower keyboards.
4 METRONOMEﾑReal Time Write only
NOTE:
Turns the metronome click on or off. When set to ON, the metronome
sounds on each beat of the measure (for example, three times per
measure in 3/4 time) to serve as a rhythmic guide when programming
The metronome is automatically set to ON
when a blank pattern has been selected,
and is set to OFF when an existing pattern
9
patterns. The metronome can be turned on or off while a rhythm is
is copied.

playing.
BEAT/QUANTIZE PageﾑReal Time Write
6) Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern

Percussion sounds can be entered by either Step Write or Real Time Write
from the EDIT page. (Sounds can also be entered in the BEAT/QUANTIZE
page by Real Time Write.) As with the BEAT/QUANTIZE page above, the
Step Write EDIT page is selected when the rhythm is stopped, and Real Time
Write EDIT is selected when the pattern is running.
131
7) Editing with Step Write
To enter sounds with Step Write:
1
Raise the rhythm volume, and turn off all the Upper and Lower
keyboard voices by setting each sectionﾕs volume to MIN.
2
Select the EDIT page with the Page buttons.
3
Select the percussion sound you wish to enter.
There are two ways to select percussion sounds in the Step Write mode:
[1] Press the key on the Upper or Lower keyboard that

corresponds to the sound. The instrument name automatically
appears at the top right of the LCD when the key is pressed. The
selected instrument is automatically assigned to an available empty
rhythm track.
[2] Use the leftmost Data Control buttons under the rhythm track
number to step through the available sixteen rhythm tracks. The
name of the instrument currently assigned to the selected track is
displayed at the top right of the LCD. (Since this method allows
you to select only from among the assigned instruments, use the
Change function described with the LCD below to change
instrument assignments.)
* This method is especially useful when editing an existing rhythm,
preset or user.
EDIT PageﾑStep Write
9 Rhythm Track Instrument Name

1 3 2
1 Rhythm Track
Selects from among the sixteen rhythm tracks and displays the
currently selected rhythm track number.
2 CHANGE
Replaces the instrument assigned to any given track with the others.
132
To replace the instrument:
1. Select the track using the Rhythm Track control above.
2. Simultaneously hold down the Data Control button corresponding
to CHANGE and press the key on the Upper or Lower keyboard
that corresponds to the instrument you want to use.
3 CLEAR
The Clear function is used to erase an instrument from the rhythm.
All instances of the selected instrument, irrespective of which tracks
they occupy, will be erased from the pattern.
There are two ways to use Clear:
[1] While holding down the Data Control button corresponding

to CLEAR, press the key on the keyboard corresponding to the
instrument you wish to erase. (A short ﾒbeepﾓ sound indicates
that the instrument has been erased.)
You can erase all of the sounds on all recorded tracks of the pattern
by holding down the Data Control button corresponding to
CLEAR and simultaneously pressing the lowest key (C1) on the
Lower keyboard.
Be careful not to do this inadvertently since all sounds will be
instantly and permanently erased.
[2] Press, then release the Data Control button corresponding to

CLEAR. The following display appears, prompting confirmation
of the operation:
9
Select [Clear] to execute the operation. Select [Cancel] to abort the operation
The message “Completed!!” briefly returning to the previous display.
appears.
4
Then, use the step forward and step reverse controls to advance or
reverse the rhythm clock to the point at which you wish to enter the
percussion sound.
133
EDIT PageﾑStep Write
2
Shows the current Measure Beat Click
Quantize value. PAGE
NOTE:
If you have copied an existing pattern, its

name will be shown below PATTERN on
the display.
1
1 Step Forward and Step Reverse Controls
Each press of the corresponding Data Control buttons advances or
reverses the rhythm clock by one step. The size of a single step is
determined by the Quantize value, set in the Beat/Quantize page.
2 Rhythm Clock
NOTE: Displays the current position in the pattern, according to the measure,
beat, and number of clicks. A click is the smallest division of a pattern,
You can return to the BEAT/QUANTIZE
and one beat is made up of 24 clicks.
page in the middle of editing and change
the time signature and/or the Quantize The rhythm clock advances up to two measure and loops back to the
value. beginning of the rhythm (1.1.1).
5
Use the Accent section of the EDIT page to enter the sound to the
selected point.
Press the Data Control buttons corresponding to each Accent to
actually enter the percussion sounds. The Accent section has nine
steps, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of 8. The
Accent 0 can be used when entering rests.
9
1
NOTE:
1 ACCENT
Records the instrument and determines its volume or Accent level.
You can record up to sixteen different Press the Data Control button that corresponds to the Accent level
instrument sounds in a single rhythm, you wish to set; the instrument is automatically inserted at that Accent
with each instrument occupying one of the
level to the selected position in the pattern (shown in the rhythm
sixteen available tracks.
Instruments can only be entered if there clock).
are empty tracks remaining. If all sixteen Selection of an Accent level automatically advances the rhythm clock
tracks have been used, no subsequently by one step, according to the current Quantize resolution value.
selected instruments can be recorded.
The Rhythm Pattern Program has
6
polyphonic capacity for playing up to 32 Repeat the above procedures #2 through #5 to layer each rhythm
sounds simultaneously. track and complete your own rhythm.
134
About Quantize
The Quantize function is a process of rounding off timing and/or duration
values.
With Real Time Write

It allows you to automatically correct the timing of the notes you play,
according to the specified Quantize resolution. The range can be corrected
is within 50 percent of the selected note (Quantize) value. No correction
occurs when you select OFF.
With Step Write

It allows you to automatically correct the length (duration) and timing of
each note you enter.
Quantize Values
Quarter note (1 beat) Eighth note (1/2 beat)
16th note (1/4 beat) 32nd note (1/8 note)

3 3
Quarter note triplet (2/3 beat) Eighth note triplet (1/3 beat)
3
16th note triplet (1/6 beat) OFF OFF (1/24 beat)
Steps Depending on the Quantize Values

1 beat
1
1 13
1 7 13 19
1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22
3
9
1 17
3
1 9 17
3
1 5 9 13 17 21

OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
* The finest timing is a Click (=1/24 beat).

3
* advances 16 clicks every step.
135
8) Editing with Real Time Write
To enter sounds with Real Time Write:
1
Raise the rhythm volume, and turn off all the Upper and Lower
keyboard voices by setting each sectionﾕs volume to MIN.
2
Select the BEAT/QUANTIZE page or EDIT page with the Page buttons,
then start the rhythm by pressing the START button to engage the
Real Time Write operation.
EDIT PageﾑReal Time Write
Only ﾒCLEARﾓ is selectable on the EDIT Page in Real Time Write.
● CLEAR
As in Step Write, the Clear function is used to erase an instrument
from the rhythm. However, the method of operation is slightly
different.
Hold down the Data Control button that corresponds to CLEAR

in the display, and simultaneously press the key on the keyboard
corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase. All instances
of the selected instrument, irrespective of which tracks they
occupy, will be erased from the pattern.
You can erase all of the sounds on all recorded tracks of the pattern
by holding CLEAR and pressing the lowest key (C1) on the Lower
9 keyboard. Be careful not to do this inadvertently since all sounds

will be instantly and permanently erased.
3
While the rhythm is running, play the percussion sounds from the
Upper and/or Lower keyboards.
Listen to the metronome click as you play the sounds, using it as a
guide to keep in time and tempo. The pattern will automatically
repeat (or ﾒloopﾓ) every two measures.
Each instrument sound is recorded and automatically assigned to a
NOTE:
separate track as you play it. All events of a single sound are assigned
As in Step Write, you can record up to to the same track; for example, if you alternately play a hi-hat sound
sixteen different instrument sounds in a with a snare drum, all notes of the hi hat will be recorded to one track
single rhythm, with each instrument
occupying one of the sixteen available
and all notes of the snare drum to another track.
tracks. Instruments can only be entered if
there are empty tracks remaining. If all
4
When youﾕve finished entering instruments to the pattern, stop it by
sixteen tracks have been used, no
subsequently recordings can be performed pressing the START button again, or by selecting the ACC.
or heard. (Accompaniment) or SAVE pages.
136
9) Selecting Accompaniment Patterns
The Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to use one of the Electoneﾕs
Accompaniment patterns with your original rhythm. You can select and save
the Accompaniment pattern that best matches the rhythm that you have
created. Also, the Rhythm Pattern Program lets you use the Lower Rhythmic
function to add your own backings, two measure long lower rhythmic patterns,
to the rhythm you created.
To select an appropriate Accompaniment pattern for your newly created

rhythm:
1
Select the ACC. (Accompaniment) page with the Page buttons.
PAGE
2
Press the button corresponding to the desired rhythm type that
contains the accompaniment you want to use, in the Rhythm section
on the panel.
RHYTHM VOLUME
MAX
1 2 ROCK 1

3 4
MIN
3
Select the desired rhythm from the menu with the Data Control
buttons.
The accompaniment type selected here can be saved with the user
rhythm. However, you cannot save the selection of the
Accompaniment TYPE and the changes in the Rhythm Condition
9
page.
4
You can also call up the Rhythm Condition page from the above NOTE:
display and set the Accompaniment volume to audition the rhythm.
To do this, press the same Data Control button as you did in step #3 If a rhythm is started in the Accompaniment
page, the Accompaniment will also be heard.
above in selecting a rhythm, and adjust the Accompaniment volume
However, both the rhythm and the
with the appropriate Data Control buttons. Accompaniment will automatically be
stopped when you leave the Accompaniment
page.
137
To create your own backings with the Lower Rhythmic
function:
You can add backings (lower rhythmic pattern) to the rhythm. The lower
rhythmic pattern, using one track, can be entered by the same method as the
one for the rhythm.
1
Select the ACC. (Accompaniment) page with the Page buttons.
PAGE
2
Select the bass pattern, or the Accompaniment type which contains
NOTE:
the bass pattern you want to use.
You cannot create your own bass pattern.
3
Press the Data Control buttons corresponding to LOWER
RHYTHMIC.
The following display appears.
LOWER RHYTHMIC Page
9
12 4 3 5
1 LOWER RHYTHMIC
Indicates that the Lower Rhythmic function is engaged. Pressing the
corresponding Data Control buttons returns you to the previous
display.
2 CLEAR
Erases the rhythmic pattern you entered.
3 CHANGE VOICE
Selects the voice used for the rhythmic pattern from the 16 different
voices.
138
Pressing the Data Control button corresponding to CHANGE VOICE
opens the following message on the display.
Select the voice you want to use by pressing the Data Control buttons
corresponding to .
The available voices are as follows:

Acc.Piano
Acc.EP (Electric Piano)
Acc.FolkGt (Acoustic Guitar)
Acc.JazzGt (Jazz Guitar)
Acc.Banjo
Acc.ElecGt (Electric Guitar)
Acc.MuteGt (Muted Guitar)
Acc.DistGt (Distortion Guitar)
Acc.Brass
Acc.Horn
Acc.Sax (Saxophone)
Acc.Clari (Clarinet)
Acc.JzOrg (Jazz Organ)
Acc.Accord (Accordion)
Acc.Woody
Acc.Metal
* Acc.: Accompaniment
4 Step Forward and Step Reverse Controls 9

Each press of the corresponding Data Control buttons advances or

reverses the rhythm clock by one step. The size of a single step is
determined by the Quantize value, set in the Beat/Quantize page.
5 ACCENT
Records the selected voice and determines its volume or Accent level. NOTE:
When the user rhythm contains the lower
4
Select a voice used for the rhythmic pattern.
rhythmic pattern data, the ACC. page is
always engaged with the Lower Rhythmic
function. If you want to use a preset
5
(If necessary) Choose the BEAT/QUANTIZE page and select the accompaniment for your rhythm, you need
desired quantize value. to erase the lower rhythmic pattern data
using the Clear operation.
6
Returns to the Lower Rhythmic (ACC.) page and press the appropriate
Accent button to actually enter the notes.
7
Repeat the above #5 and #6 steps to complete your own rhythmic
pattern.
139
10) Saving Rhythm Patterns
To save a newly created rhythm to a User pattern number:
1
Select the SAVE page with the Page buttons.
The current rhythm, if playing, will automatically be stopped when
this page is selected.
PAGE
2
Using the appropriate Data Control buttons, select both the User
number and variation type to which you wish to save the newly created
rhythm.
Keep in mind that you cannot save a rhythm by selecting only a User
number; you must also select a variation type-A,B,C,D, or FILL (Fill
In). Including the Fill In patterns, up to 40 different rhythms (8 User
numbers x 5 variations) can be saved.
SAVE Page
1 2 3 4
1 USER1 - 8
9 USER Numbers
2 A~D
Variations
3 FILL
Fill In
4 Remaining Memory
Indicates the amount of memory available for storing rhythms.
This is expressed as a percentage: 100% indicates the maximum
amount of memory available, and 0% indicates that there is no more
memory available.
Once you have selected a User number and type, the following display
will appear, prompting confirmation of the operation.
140
3
(If necessary) Press the Data Control buttons below [Edit Name] to
give a name to the rhythm you have created.
The method to edit the name is the same as the one for the song
name in the M.D.R. section, See page 92 for more information. Up
to 10 characters can be used in this case.
4
Select [Save] to save the rhythm or [Cancel] to abort the operation
and return to the previous display.
When the pattern has been saved, the message ﾒCompleted!!ﾓ

momentarily appears.
When the pattern cannot be saved because of lack of available memory
space, the following display appears.
You should periodically save your rhythm as you are making it and NOTE:
check the amount of remaining memory. If the rhythm currently
being edited cannot be saved because of a lack of memory space, The Power On Reset function (page 85)
can be to delete all User rhythms from
erase some of the less necessary percussion sounds with the Clear memory.
function, and try saving the pattern again.
11) Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program 9

You can quit the Rhythm Pattern Program from any of its display pages.

To do this:
1
Press the PATTERN button in the DISPLAY SELECT section once
again.
If a rhythm is playing, it will automatically be stopped. The following
display will appear, prompting confirmation of the operation.
2
Select [Exit] to leave the Rhythm Pattern Program, or [Cancel] to NOTE:
abort the operation and return to the previous display.
If you leave the Rhythm Pattern Program
without having edited any patterns, this
display will not appear.
141
12) Recalling User Rhythm Patterns
The User rhythms you have created in the Rhythm Pattern Program can be
selected and played from the panel Rhythm controls.
To call up the User rhythms:
1
Press one of the Dotted buttons in the Rhythm section.
RHYTHM VOLUME
MAX
1 2 ROCK 1

3 4
MIN
The Rhythm Menu appears.
2
Select the USER page with the Page buttons.
PAGE
3
NOTE: Select the desired User rhythm from the LCD display by using the
Data Control buttons.
When you select the user rhythm with the Be sure to select both a User number and a variation type (A, B, C, or
Lower Rhythmic function (page 138)
D).
turned on, ﾒRHYTHMICﾓ will be shown
above the ﾒACCOMPANI.ﾓ on the LCD
display.
9
Playing User Fill In Patterns:

NOTE:
You can play User Fill In patterns by selecting the desired User
A press of the FILL IN button plays back
only the first measure if you have
number and pressing the FILL IN button in the Rhythm section
created a two-measure fill in pattern. on the panel.
Holding down the FILL IN button
allows you to play back the entire fill in
pattern.
142
13) Selecting Rhythms From a Pattern Disk (Optional)
You can also load the rhythms from optional Pattern Disks to the User rhythms
in the Rhythm Menu.
To do this:
1
Press the PATTERN button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.
2
Select the DISK page with the Page buttons.
The message ﾒInsert Pattern Disk!!ﾓ appears and prompts you the
operation.
3
Insert the Pattern Disk into the disk slot under the Music Disk
Recorder.
The pattern number and name from the Pattern Disk appears.
PATTERN DISK Page
Pressing these buttons steps through the

pattern numbers; the name of each pattern
appears on the display as well. Refer to
the list included with your Pattern Disk
for pattern numbers and names.
4
Using any of the Data Control button pairs, select the pattern you
wish to load.
5 9
Start the rhythm to check the pattern to be called up. Select other
patterns (as you did in step #4 above) and check those patterns as
well.
6 Rhythm Pattern Program and Rhythm Sequence Program

If you want to save the current pattern to a User Rhythm space, select
the previous page, ﾒSAVEﾓ with the Page buttons.
7
Press the corresponding Data Control buttons to designate both the
User Rhythm number and its variation type (A, B, C, or D).
Press one of the four Data Control buttons below [Save] on the display
to save the pattern, or one of the four buttons below [Cancel] to abort
the operation and return to the previous display.
When the pattern has been saved, a ﾒcompleted!!ﾓ message appears.
143
2 Rhythm Sequence Program
With the Rhythm Sequence Program function, you can connect any of
the Electoneﾕs existing rhythms and the rhythms of your own creation
together to make complete rhythm compositions. You can save four
NOTE:
rhythm compositions to the Sequence buttons on the panel for future
When you select one of the sequences in recall.
this step, any editing done to that sequence
is instantly and automatically saved. This
1) Selecting a Sequence
means that if you select a sequence that is
already programmed, any editing you do
1
Press the SEQUENCE button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.
will permanently change the sequence and
the original sequence cannot be recovered. The LEDs of the numbered Sequence buttons in the Rhythm section
on the panel will flash and the following display will prompt you to
VOICE
DISPLAY
EFFECT
SET
A. B. C.
M. O. C.
select a sequence number.
FOOT REGIST. EXP.

RHYTHM
VOICE PROGRAM
RHYTHM VOLUME
MAX
1 2 ROCK 1
U. FLUTE L. FLUTE TREMOLO USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 USER 4 A B
VOICE VOICE (FAST)

3 4
DISPLAY SELECT MIN
2
Press one of the Sequence buttons to call up the Rhythm Sequence
display.
Position Indication
9 Pattern row to
Current cursor be entered
position
In this display, different rhythms (both Preset rhythms and User

rhythms that you created with the Rhythm Pattern Program) can be
entered in sequence along the pattern row in the middle of the display.
Entered patterns are shown in boxes, while the numbers in the row
NOTE: above indicate the position.
Up to three-character code inside each box indicates the type and
Any rhythm currently playing will
automatically be stopped when you call up number of the rhythm. The preset rhythms of the Electone are
the Rhythm Sequence Program function. indicated by a two-digit number (i.e., [05] or [16]). User patterns are
Also, use of the Music Disk Recorder indicated by the ﾒUﾓ prefix as well as a letter suffix representing the
function automatically cancels Rhythm type-A,B,C,D, and F (Fill In). Examples of these include [U3C] and
Sequence operations.
[U8F]. The preset patterns also may have a letter suffix: ﾒIﾓ indicates
Intro, ﾒFﾓ indicates Fill In, and ﾒEﾓ indicates Ending (i.e., [01I], [20F],
and [16E]).
144
2) Programming a Sequence
1
Select the type of rhythm you wish to enter, Preset or User.
Press these Data Control buttons to

select PRESET and USER, alternately.
2
Select the desired rhythm by pressing the appropriate button in the
Rhythm section, then select SET in the display to enter the pattern.
(Refer to the Rhythm Pattern Number Table below for a list of the You can program the rhythm sequence a
measure at a time. Every User rhythm
rhythms and their number assignments.)
consists of two measures. If you want to
･ When PRESET is selected in step #1 above, the Rhythm buttons program two-measure User rhythms, you
are required to enter it twice, for the first
are used to select the Preset rhythm names printed at the top.
measure and the second measure.
･ When USER is selected, however, these buttons function according When entered, the first measure is
displayed as positive box and the
to the User numbers and letters printed at the bottom. Select the
second measure is displayed as negative
User pattern by pressing one of the numbered buttons (1-8), then box .
a lettered button (A, B, C, or D) or FILL (for User Fill In). The rhythm patterns can be divided into
RHYTHM VOLUME
four groups: Normal such as and ,
MAX Intro, Fill In and Ending. When changing
1 2 ROCK 1 the type, for example, from Normal to Fill
In and Fill In to Normal while
programming a rhythm sequence, the first
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
TANGO LATIN 1 LATIN 2 8 BEAT 16 BEAT 2 measure of the newly selected type will
USER 5 USER 6 USER 7 USER 8 C D always be selected and follow. However,
9
MIN
when the same type continues even
though you change the rhythm, for
Currently selected pattern, or the pattern
at the current cursor position. example, from to , the second
measure may succeed the sequence. That

means some of the User rhythms inserted
in a rhythm sequence may begin from its
second measure.
To keep this from happening and begin
the newly selected rhythm from the first
measure, insert a different type, Fill In,
before using the new rhythm pattern.
NOTE:
Press SET to select the rhythm pattern.
A maximum of 120 patterns can be entered
to a single sequence.
145
Rhythm Pattern Number Table
01 March 1 18 Bolero 35 Slow Rock 3 5 2 8 Beat 3

02 March 2 19 Swing 1 36 Tango 1 5 3 8 Beat 4
03 March 3 20 Swing 2 37 Tango 2 5 4 8 Beat 5
04 Polka 1 21 Swing 3 38 Tango 3 5 5 Dance Pop 1
05 Polka 2 22 Swing 4 39 Cha-cha 5 6 Dance Pop 2
06 Country 1 23 Swing 5 40 Rhumba 5 7 Dance Pop 3
07 Country 2 24 Swing 6 41 Beguine 5 8 Dance Pop 4
08 Broadway 25 Jazz Ballad 42 Mambo 5 9 16 Beat 1
09 Baroque 26 Dixieland 1 43 Salsa 6 0 16 Beat 2
10 Waltz 1 27 Dixieland 2 44 Samba 1 6 1 16 Beat 3
11 Waltz 2 28 Bounce 1 45 Samba 2 6 2 16 Beat 4
12 Waltz 3 29 Bounce 2 46 Samba 3 6 3 16 Beat 5
13 Waltz 4 30 Bounce 3 47 Bossanova 1 6 4 16 Beat Funk 1
14 Waltz 5 31 Reggae 1 48 Bossanova 2 6 5 16 Beat Funk 2
15 Jazz Waltz 1 32 Reggae 2 49 Bossanova 3 6 6 16 Beat Funk 3
16 Jazz Waltz 2 33 Slow Rock 1 50 8 Beat 1
17 Jazz Waltz 3 34 Slow Rock 2 51 8 Beat 2
Examples of Fill In, Intro./Ending Examples of User

01F March 1 Fill In U1A User 1 A
01I March 1 Intro. U1B User 1 B
01E March 1 Ending U1C User 1 C
U1D User 1 D * The Intro. selected in the
Accompaniment page when in
U1F User 1 Fill In the Rhythm Pattern Program.
U1I User 1 Intro. * ** The Ending selected in the
Accompaniment page when in
U1E User 1 Ending **
the Rhythm Pattern Program.
9
3
If you wish to enter a Fill In, Intro, or Ending pattern, hold down the
appropriate rhythm control button on the panel (INTRO. ENDING
or FILL IN) and simultaneously press the Data Control button

corresponding to SET.
ENDING START
1. While holding down INTRO.

ENDING or FILL IN... FILL IN
2. ...press SET
146
Entering Intro. And Ending Patterns:
Pressing the INTRO. ENDING button when at the first position
in the pattern row automatically enters an Intro pattern there.
Pressing the INTRO. ENDING button at any other position in Any existing pattern data that follows an
the row enters an Ending pattern. Ending pattern is automatically deleted.
4
Use the cursor controls to move the cursor along the pattern row in
the display and select the position at which patterns will be entered.
Then use the data controls to enter and delete pattern numbers in the
pattern row.
SEQUENCE Page
Pattern row to be The measure number at Currently selected pattern
entered and edited the current cursor position name (and its variation type) NOTE:
An Intro or Fill In pattern entered to the

first position is not registered as a measure,
and the current measure display shows ﾒ-
Barﾓ even though a pattern has been
entered.
1 -1 1 -2 1 -3 2 -1 2 -2 2 -3 2 -4 2 -5 NOTE:
1 2 The Coarse button can also be used with
the cursor controls to move the cursor
1 Cursor Controls several steps at a time.
1 -1 |<< Moves the cursor to the first position.

NOTE:
1 -2 < Moves the cursor one measure to the left.
1 -3 > Moves the cursor one measure to the right. To create your own rhythm sequence you
need to assign the rhythms you use to the
rhythm buttons and dotted buttons on the
2 Data Controls panel beforehand.
2 -1 PRESET/USER
Selects the type of rhythm, Preset or User. 9
2 -2 SET

For initially entering a pattern number to an empty position in the
pattern row, or for replacing a pattern at the cursor position.
2 -3 INS. (Insert)
For inserting a pattern number before the current cursor position.
The new pattern is entered to the cursor position and all other patterns
to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new number.
The operation is the same as for SET .
2 -4 DEL. (Delete)
For deleting a pattern number at the current cursor position.
2 -5 CLEAR
For erasing all patterns entered to the selected sequence. After selecting
CLEAR, the display for confirmation of the operation appears.
Select [Clear] to clear the currently selected rhythm sequence, or [Cancel]
to abort the operation and return to the previous display.
147
Audition:
You can play the rhythm sequence at any time during the editing process
by moving the cursor to the point at which you wish to begin playback
and pressing the Rhythm START button.
About Using Registration Memory with the Rhythm Sequence Program:

The rhythms (Rhythm Menu) used to program the sequence can be
changed during editing by selecting different registrations. This allows
you to create a registration that contains the specific rhythms that you
will use in a given sequence, and call up that registration when editing
the sequence.
3) Quitting Rhythm Sequence Program

To quit the Rhythm Sequence Program:
Press the SEQUENCE button in the DISPLAY SELECT section once again.
(The LED of the button will turn off.)
4) Playing Rhythm Sequences

To play any of the rhythm sequences you have created:
1
Press the appropriate Sequence button on the panel.
RHYTHM VOLUME
MAX
1 2 ROCK 1

3 4
9 MIN
2
Press the rhythm START button.

ENDING START
FILL IN
When one of the four rhythm sequences is playing, each programmed

rhythm that plays is indicated by the lit LED on the Rhythm panel
button.
When a Preset rhythm is playing, the current pattern buttonﾕs LED is
lit.
When a User rhythm is playing, the LEDs of two pattern buttons
(User number and type) are lit.
148
5) Playing All Sequences in Order
You can also have up to all four rhythm sequences automatically play in
order, one after the other.
To do this:
1
Press the desired Sequence buttons, making sure that their LEDs are
all lit.
RHYTHM VOLUME
MAX
1 2 ROCK 1

3 4
MIN
2
Press the START button.

ENDING START
FILL IN
The rhythm sequences start from the lowest number and play in order
NOTE:
automatically to the highest number. (For example, if you press
Sequence buttons 4, 2 and 1 in that order, the sequences will be The SEQ. lamp goes out when the
played back in their numeric order: 1, 2, then 4.) This function sequence assigned to it is finished.
effectively allows you to make a long rhythm sequence that exceeds

the 120-pattern memory limit of a single sequence. NOTE:
Pressing the SEQ. button during the

Sequence
1
Sequence
2
Sequence
3
Sequence
4
playback of the rhythm sequence that is
made up of several sequences (SEQ.
buttons) cancels the current sequence and
9
3

start the next sequence.
149
NOTE:
To start the sequence using the Left Footswitch:
1
Select STOP from the RHYTHM CONTROL (page 152) on the
When you are playing the rhythm
FOOTSWITCH-LEFT display.
sequence that is made up of several
sequences (SEQ. buttons), pressing the
2
Left Footswitch turns off the currently Press the Left Footswitch with your right foot to turn the sequence
played-back rhythm sequence and on. Pressing the Left Footswitch again in the middle of the sequence
pressing it again starts the next sequence. playback cancels the rhythm sequence function.
Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data to Disk:

Once you have created your own rhythms and rhythm sequences, youﾕll
want to save them to disk. Doing so allows you to free up memory in the
Electone for creating additional rhythms and sequences. Also, the User
rhythms and sequences youﾕve saved to disk can be loaded back to the
Electone any time.
Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence data are included in the bulk data
that is saved when you record registrations to disk. Refer to the section
Recording Registrations, page 96, for instructions.
Loading Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data from Disk:

NOTE:
The Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence data saved to disk as a part of
When loading your original Rhythm
Program data back to the Electone, be bulk data, can instantly be loaded back to the Electone. Refer to the section
sure to stop the rhythm if it is playing. Recalling Recorded Registrations, page 97, for instructions.
Loading cannot be executed when a
rhythm is running.
9
150
10 Footswitches, Knee Lever and
Expression Pedals
These leg- and foot-operated controls allow you to turn on and execute various performance functions
without taking your hands from the keyboards.
1 Footswitch
The Electone has two Footswitches on the main expression pedal that
can be used to control various functions. The Right Footswitch is used
for the Registration Shift functions (page 82). The Left Footswitch can
be set to control one of the following functions: Glide, Tremolo, rhythm
controls. VOICE EFFECT A. B. C.
Assignments of the functions are made in the FOOTSWITCH pages.
To select the Footswitch pages: FOOT

SW.
REGIST. EXP.
SHIFT PITCH/MIDI
Press the FOOT SW. button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.

RHYTHM
FOOTSWITCH-LEFT page VOICE
EDIT
PROGRAM
PATTERN SEQUENCE

VOICE VOICE (FAST)
DISPLAY SELECT
OFF
Cancels Left Footswitch control.
10
Footswitches, Knee Lever and Expression Pedals
151
1) Rhythm Control
Selection of Left Footswitch control over rhythm functions. When this is
chosen, the following display appears:
FOOTSWITCH-LEFT PageﾑRhythm
1 2 3
One of the three Rhythm Control functions can be selected. Pressing the
Footswitch executes the corresponding function.
1 STOP
Functions as an on/off switch for the rhythm or the rhythm sequence.
2 ENDING
Switches the rhythm to the Ending pattern, after which the rhythm is
stopped.
3 FILL IN
Switches the rhythm to the Fill In pattern.
2) Glide Control
Selection of Footswitch control over Glide. Pressing the Footswitch
immediately lowers the pitch of the selected voice or voices by a halfstep, and
releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original. When the Glide setting is
chosen, the following display appears:
FOOT SWITCH-LEFT PageﾑGlide
10
1 2
NOTE:
1 Voice Sections/GLIDE CONTROL
The Glide function can be applied to any or all of the voice sections
When the Glide function is applied, the shown in the display: Upper 1 and 2, Lead 1 and 2, Lower 1 and 2.
Vibrato is not effective.
Select the desired voice section(s).
2 TIME
Determines the speed of the Glide function, or in other words, how
gradually the pitch returns when the Footswitch is released. Higher
settings produce slower pitch changes.
152
3) Tremolo Control
Selection of Footswitch control over Tremolo. Pressing the Footswitch turns
the Tremolo effect on and off (Chorus), performing the same function as the
TREMOLO (FAST) button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.
If you want to use this function, the tremolo settings require to be set properly.
See page 56 for more information.
FOOT SWITCH-LEFT PageﾑTremolo
2 Knee Lever
The Knee Lever, located on the underside of the keyboard panel, can be
used to turn on and off the Sustain effect, Melody On Chord function,
Lead Slide effect and Solo Mode/Upper Mode.
1) Sustain
To select Knee Lever control over Sustain:
1
Make sure that the Upper and/or Lower Sustain effect panel controls
have been turned on; otherwise the Knee Lever will have no effect.
SUSTAIN
UPPER
(KNEE)
LOWER PEDAL
(KNEE)
10
2
Fold the Knee Lever down. Footswitches, Knee Lever and Expression Pedals
3
Press the Knee Lever to the right with your knee when you want to
have sustain.
1 When the Knee Lever is folded up: Folding down
The sustain effect is applied constantly, as long as the front panel

sustain buttons are on.
2 When the Knee Lever is vertical: 1 ON
The sustain effect is cancelled.
3 When the Knee Lever is continuously pressed to the right:
The sustain effect is on. 3
ON
OFF
2
153
VOICE
DISPLAY
EFFECT
SET
A. B. C.
M. O. C. 2) Melody On Chord
To select Knee Lever control over Melody On Chord:
1
FOOT REGIST. EXP.
SW. SHIFT PITCH/MIDI Press the A.B.C./M.O.C. button in the DISPLAY SELECT section to
select the A.B.C./M.O.C. page.
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
2
VOICE
EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE Then set the KNEE control to ON, and select one of the modes.

VOICE VOICE (FAST)
DISPLAY SELECT
3
Press the Knee Lever continuously to the right to get the Melody On
NOTE:
Chord effect in the middle of the performance.
If the KNEE is set to ON, the Melody On
Chord cannot be applied without using the
Knee Lever.
3) Lead Slide
To select Knee Lever control over Lead Slide:
1
Call up the Lead Condition display, by pressing a Lead Voice button
twice (or the Data Control button corresponding to a Lead voice).
2
Select PAGE 3 by pressing Page buttons.
3
Then select KNEE and set the TIME parameter in the SLIDE controls.
4
Press the Knee Lever continuously to the right to get the Lead Slide
NOTE:
10 If the KNEE is set to ON, the Lead Slide

cannot be applied without using the Knee
effect in the middle of the performance.
Lever.
4) Solo Mode (Turning on the Solo Mode)

See page 29 for entering the Solo Mode and switching between Solo Mode
and Upper Mode.
154
3 Expression Pedals
There are two types of Expression Pedals: the Expression Pedal which
controls the volume during performance with your toe, and the 2nd
Expression Pedal which can control the Pitch Bend and Tempo.
Second Expression PedalﾑPitch Bend And Tempo

To select the 2nd Expression page:
Press the EXP. PITCH/MIDI button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.
EXPRESSION
2ND EXPRESSION Page
FOOT REGIST. EXP.

1 2 3 VOICE
EDIT
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
PATTERN SEQUENCE
Pitch Bend Control

1 MODE U. FLUTE
VOICE
L. FLUTE TREMOLO
VOICE (FAST)
Determines the range of the Pitch Bend control. Range: 1 - 12
The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of pitch variation
(within ｱtwo semitones); the setting 12 (WIDE) results in a large DISPLAY SELECT
amount of pitch variation (within ｱone octave). (This control is the
same as for Tempo below; the two cannot be used independently.)
2 Voice Sections/PITCH BEND
Selects the voice sections to which the Pitch Bend function will be
applied. Pitch Bend can be selected independently or together for
Upper Voices 1 and 2, Lead Voices 1 and 2, Pedal Voices 1 and 2.
When on, pressing the pedal with your toe raises the pitch; pressing
it with your heel lowers the pitch.
10
155
Tempo Control
1 MODE
Determines the range of the Tempo control. Range: 1 - 12
The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of tempo variation
NOTE:
(70%-140%); the setting 12 (WIDE) results in a large amount of tempo
Donﾕt use the Pitch Bend and Tempo at variation (50%-200%). (This control is the same as for Pitch Bend
the same time since you may inadvertently above; the two cannot be used independently.)
apply both two controls at once.
3 TEMPO
On/off switch for control over the rhythm tempo. When on, pressing
the pedal with your toe speeds up the tempo; pressing it with your
heel slows it down. Releasing the pedal from either position causes it
to return to center, restoring the original tempo.
10
156
11 Transpose and Pitch Controls
There are two pitch-related controls on the Electone: Transpose and Pitch. Transpose allows you to change
the key of the instrument and Pitch lets you finely adjust the tuning. These features make it easy to change the
key of a song to accommodate a vocalistﾕs range or to precisely match the tuning of another instrument.
To select the Pitch page: VOICE

DISPLAY
EFFECT
SET
A. B. C.
M. O. C.
Press the EXP. PITCH/MIDI button in the DISPLAY SELECT section, and
select the Pitch page with the Page buttons. FOOT
SW.
REGIST. EXP.
SHIFT PITCH/MIDI
PITCH CONTROL Page

RHYTHM
PAGE VOICE PROGRAM

VOICE VOICE (FAST)
1 2
DISPLAY SELECT
1 TRANSPOSE
Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the voices, and is adjustable NOTE:
in half-steps (semitones). Range: -6 - +6 (one octave)
The default Pitch is 440.0Hz (=A3).
2 PITCH
Determines the fine pitch setting of all the voices.
Range: 438.8 - 444.5Hz (Ca. a quarter semitone) NOTE:
The pitch changes cannot be recorded to

the Music Disk Recorder.
About the Pitch

Each voice is tuned with the temperament.
Cent
LEAD voice 1/2 +6.0
LEAD
NOTE:
UK voice 1 +2.4
UK1 When matching the pitch with other
UK voice 2 +1.2
UK2 instrument, use the Clarinet voice on
LK voice 1 0 (Standard 440Hz) the Lower keyboard.
LK1
LK voice 2
PK voice1/2
-1.2
-3.6
LK2
11
PK1/2
Transpose and Pitch Controls
157
12 MIDI
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a kind of communication system for electronic musical
instruments. It is built into most every modern digital musical instrument and allows different instruments
to ﾒtalkﾓ to each other and control each otherﾕs functions. For example, the Upper keyboard of your Electone
could be used to play sounds on a connected synthesizer. In another application, a rhythm machine can be
programmed to play its rhythms in perfect synchronization with the tempo set on the Electone. To use the
MIDI functions you must, of course, have a second MIDI device (such as a synthesizer or rhythm machine),
and a set of MIDI cables. For more information see page 161.
DISPLAY SET M. O. C. To select the MIDI page:
Press the EXP. PITCH/MIDI button in the DISPLAY SELECT section, and
FOOT
SW.
REGIST. EXP.
SHIFT PITCH/MIDI select the MIDI page with the Page buttons.
RHYTHM
MIDI CONTROL Page
VOICE PROGRAM PAGE

VOICE VOICE (FAST)
DISPLAY SELECT 1
1 Output (Transmit) Channels
For setting the channels over which MIDI information will be
transmitted. Any channel from 1 through 16 can be assigned to each
keyboard, the Upper keyboard, the Lower keyboard and the
Pedalboard
UPPER: 1 - 16
LOWER: 1 - 16
PEDAL: 1 - 16
The MIDI receive channel of each connected MIDI device should match the
numbers set here.
Receive Channels
When using another MIDI device to play the Electoneﾕs voices, you must
set the MIDI transmit channel(s) of the connected device to match the
receive channel(s) of the Electone. The MIDI receive channels of the
Electone are fixed to the following values:
Upper= 1, Lower= 2 and Pedal= 3.
12 The MIDI transmit channel of each connected MIDI device should match
the above numbers.
MIDI
158
MIDI CONTROL Page
PAGE
1 2 3
Internal/External Control
1 LEAD
Determines Internal or External control of the Lead Voices. When NOTE:
set to Internal, Lead Voices are played from the Electone and the
Accompaniment pattern sounds cannot be
sounds from a connected MIDI instrument can be played via MIDI
controlled via MIDI.
channel 1 (or channel 2, when the To Lower function is on). When
set to External, the Lead Voices can only be played from the connected
instrument via MIDI channel 4.
2 SYNC.
Determines the source of the timing control, for rhythm
synchronization purposes. Setting this to Internal gives the Electone
timing control over the connected rhythm machine. This also allows
you to start and stop the rhythms of the connected rhythm machine
from the Electoneﾕs panel controls. Setting this to External gives
timing control to the connected rhythm machine.
3 EXP.
Determines the control of the expression pedal functions. Ordinarily,
this control is set to Auto. However, when it is set to INT., you can
manually control the expression pedal functions during M.D.R.
playback. When set to EXT., another (external) Electone controls
over the expression pedal functions.
L.I.T. (Lead Initial Touch) Control NOTE:

At the right side of the MIDI page, there is the L.I.T. control.
This control has no relation to MIDI.
L.I.T. 1:
When descending notes are played in legato with the monophonic
lead voices, the last note played has the same initial touch response
as the previous note.
L.I.T. 2:
Default setting. When descending notes are played in legato with the
monophonic lead voices, the last note played sounds according to
12
the velocity at which it is played.
MIDI
159
13 Accessory Jacks and Controls
On the underside of the Electone keyboard is a separate panel equipped with various input/output terminals
and miscellaneous controls, the functions of which are described below.
4 -1 3
REV VOL MIC.
MAX MIN
4 -2 HEADPHONES 6
TO HOST
7
HOST SELECT
4 -3
L R Mac MIDI
PC-1 PC-2
OUT
2 -2 AUX.
IN 5
AUX.
1 -2 MIDI
OUT IN IN OUT
L AUX. R L RHYTHM R
2 -1 1 -1
1 Input Jacks
1 -1 RHYTHM IN (Phone, L/R)
This pair of phone jacks are for connection to an external rhythm machine.
The sound of the connected device is mixed with the sound of the Electone
and played through the Electoneﾕs speaker system. The volume of the rhythm
machine can be controlled by the Expression pedal of the Electone.
1 -2 AUX. IN (RCA, L/R)
This pair of RCA pin jacks are for connection to an external stereo sound
source, such as a cassette deck or home audio system. The sound of the
connected device is mixed with the sound of the Electone and played through
the Electoneﾕs speaker system. Adjust the level by using the control(s) on the
connected device.
2 Output Jacks
2 -1 AUX. OUT (Phone, L/R), 2 -2 AUX. OUT (RCA, L/R)
These two separate sets of stereo outputs are for connection to external
amplification/speaker systems.
3 HEADPHONES (Phone)
For connection of a stereo headphone set. When headphones are connected
to this jack, sound to the Electoneﾕs built-in speaker system is automatically
cut off, allowing you to play without disturbing others.
4 Microphone
Accessory Jacks and Controls
4 -1 MIC. (Phone)
For connection of a microphone.
4 -2 MIC. VOL.
For adjusting the level of the microphone input.
4 -3 MIC. REV.
For adjusting the amount of reverb applied to the mic input.
5 MIDI IN/OUT
For connecting external devices such as synthesizer and rhythm machine
with MIDI cables.
13 6 TO HOST
This terminal can be connected to the serial port of a personal computer
instead of using MIDI connection.
NOTE:
7 HOST SELECT
See page 161 for the details of the When you have connected the Electone and the personal computer using
connection using the TO HOST terminal. the TO HOST terminal, you need to select the appropriate setting here
depending on the computer used.
160
14 Appendix
MIDI
MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface,
which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each
other, by sending and receiving MIDI messages.
On the right underside of the Electone keyboard you will find the MIDI
IN/OUT jacks and TO HOST terminal. If your Electone is connected
with external devices via these MIDI jacks (with a personal computer
via the TO HOST terminal) and appropriate MIDI settings are done, you
can play an external MIDI device such as synthesizer from your Electone
keyboard or your Electone can be played by an external device such as
sequencer (by a personal computer with a sequencing software installed).
To connect your Electone with an external MIDI device you need to
prepare a pair of MIDI cables (or a serial cable when you connect the
Electone with a personal computer via the TO HOST terminal).
Also, to exchange the data between your Electone and connected MIDI
NOTE:
device you have to match the MIDI transmit/receive channels on both
devices. See page 158 for the detailed information about the MIDI channel See page 163 for more information on the
settings. MIDI messages.
Setting examples
Using the TO HOST terminal
If you want to connect your Electone with a personal computer, a NOTE:
MIDI interface will be necessary. However, using a separately available
Serial Cable allows you to directly connect them (between the TO MIDI jacks will be inactive when the TO
HOST terminal is currently used.
HOST terminal of your Electone and the Serial Port of the personal
computer). In this case you need to select one of the HOST SELECT
switches to match the computer type you use.
IBM PC/AT NOTE:
HOST SELECT For Windows users: To actually exchange
PC-2 PC-1 8-pin MINI DIN to
MIDI Mac D-SUB 9-pin Cable the data via the Serial Cable you need to install
the appropriate MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX
TO
HOST Driver) to your personal computer in advance.
Please visit Yamaha XG web site, <http://
www.yamaha.co.jp/english/xg/index.html>,
and download it.
RS-232C
EL-900 (DB9) IBM PC/AT NOTE:
Macintosh Select the HOST SELECT switches as

follows:
HOST SELECT
When you use MIDI connection: MIDI
PC-2 PC-1 Macintosh Peripheral When you use Windows system: PC-2
MIDI Mac Cable (M0197)
When you use Macintosh: Mac
TO
HOST
Appendix
EL-900 Macintosh
14
161
Using MIDI IN/OUT jacks
Controls an external device using the Controls the EL-900 using an external Exchanges the data between EL-900
EL-900 (as a master) device (as a slave) and an external device
EL-900 EL-900 EL-900
MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN MIDI OUT

HOST SELECT HOST SELECT HOST SELECT
PC-2 PC-1 PC-2 PC-1 PC-2 PC-1
MIDI Mac MIDI Mac MIDI Mac
MIDI OUT MIDI IN

MIDI IN MIDI OUT
MIDI Interface
MU-80 etc.
MIDI keyboard PC
1. Control an external device using the EL-900

● Playing your Electone can cause the MIDI keyboard (or tone generator) to be played using its own voices,
accomplishing thick sound layers. (The MIDI receive channel of the MIDI keyboard must match the
transmit channel of your Electone.)
● Various messages including the values how far the expression pedal is pressed down and how hard you
play the Electone keyboard can be transmitted as digital data. However, whether and how the external
device responds or not depends on the external device you have connected.
● The performance on the EL-900 can be recorded onto your personal computer using a sequencing software.
2. Control the EL-900 using an external device

● Playing the external MIDI keyboard can cause your Electone to be played using Electoneﾕs voices. (The
MIDI transmit channel of the MIDI keyboard must match the receive channel of your Electone. The
channels 1, 2 and 3 for the Upper, Lower and pedal voices, respectively.)
● EL-900 can be played as a rhythm machine by playing the external MIDI device. (The MIDI transmit
channel of the MIDI keyboard should be 15, in this case.)
● EL-900 will work as an XG tone generator and play back the MIDI data transmitted from the personal
computer (a sequencing software). See page 166 for the details to use the EL-900 as an XG tone generator.
Appendix
14
162
The MIDI Messages of the EL-900
The MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: the Channel Messages
and System Messages. Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI
messages which the EL-900 can receive/transmit.
Channel Messages
The Channel Messages are the data related to the performance on the keyboard
for the specific channel. Each time you play the keyboard on the EL-900, the
channel messages, which keys are played and how hard the keys are pressed,
will be transmitted via a specific channel. The channel messages from an
external keyboard can be received by the EL-900 and thus you can play the
EL-900 from an external keyboard.
Note On
Indicates which keys are played with the note numbers 0 through
127. The reception note range is C-2 (0) ﾐ G8 (127), C3 = 60.
Velocity
Indicates how hard the key is held. The range is 1 ﾐ 127.
Note Off
Generated when a key is released.
Program Change
The Program Change messages allow you to change voices in the middle of a NOTE:
song. With these messages you can change the registrations of the EL-900.
For more detailed information see MIDI
Data Format on page 167 and MIDI
Implementation Chart on page 179.
Control Change
The Control Change messages let you select a voice bank, control volume, NOTE:
panning, modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other controller
parameters, through specific Control Change numbers which correspond to For more detailed information on the
Control Change messages available for the
each of the various parameters.
EL-900 see MIDI Data Format on page 167
and MIDI Implementation Chart on page
179.
Appendix
14
163
System Messages
The System Messages are the data related to the overall system of the device.
System Exclusive Messages

System Exclusive messages are used to exchange the system and voice/
registration data. These allow you to execute bulk dump operation, sending
and receiving all the data of the EL-900 including registrations to and from an
external device. This is especially useful for you to build up the library of the
registration data in a device like a hard disk.
Examples of Exchanging the Data

NOTE: Use the following examples to send (or receive) the registration data
You also need a sequencing software, to (or from) a personal computer (a sequencing software).
which has been properly installed in the
personal computer, and which can send First, you need to connect your EL-900 with a personal computer (a
and receive system exclusive messages. sequencing software) using a Serial Cable or a MIDI cable (page 161).
Send the Registration Data from the EL-900 to the

Personal Computer (PC)
･ Preparation
1
Set the Strings voice on the Upper Keyboard of the EL-900.
Press STRINGS button for the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 section, and
select String 1 from the Strings Menu.
2
Store the registration to the Registration Memory button 1.
While holding down the M. button Press the Registration Memory
button 1.
･ Sending the Registration Data
3
Send the Request-to-Send all RAM message, ﾒF0, 43, 70, 70, 10, F7ﾓ
NOTE:
(Hexadecimal), from the sequencing software (PC) to the EL-900.
Depending on the capacity of your
sequencing software, you may need to Once the EL-900 receive the Request-to-Send all RAM message, the
divide the data into two and send them to EL-900 automatically sends all registration data in the all registration
the PC separately. numbers to your PC. You can store the registration data in a file on
your PC.
Appendix
14
164
Send the Registration Data from your PC to the EL-
900 and Change the Registration Memory Buttons
･ Receiving the Registration Data
1
Send the Request-to-Receive all RAM message, ﾒF0, 43, 70, 70, 20,
F7ﾓ (Hexadecimal), from the sequencing software (PC) to the EL-
900.
Once the EL-900 receive the Request-to-Receive all RAM message,
the EL-900 automatically receives all registration data and relocates
them to the all registration numbers.
･ Selecting the Registration Memory Buttons

Sending the Program Change messages from the PC to your EL-900 makes it
possible to change the registration on the EL-900.
2
Send the Program Change message, ﾒCF, 00ﾓ (Hexadecimal) to the
EL-900.
Once the Program Change message is received, the EL-900
automatically turns the Registration Memory button 1 on.
･ Sending the Note-On Messages
3
Send the Note-On message, ﾒ90, 30, 7Fﾓ (Hexadecimal) to the EL-
900.
The EL-900 receives the Note-On message and plays the C2 key on
the Upper Keyboard using the Strings 1 you have selected on the
previous page.
All the above operations can also be done with the M.D.R. easily and
efficiently. However, using the PC/ hard disk allows you to build up
a large data library a single disk cannot deal with.
Appendix
14
165
Use the EL-900 as an XG Tone Generator
You can also use the EL-900 as an XG tone generator since the EL-900 is
NOTE: compatible with the XG format. You can play back the commercially available
The M.D.R. section of the EL-900 allows XG song data with the electoneﾕs M.D.R., and also play them using an external
you to play back the commercially sequencer (or sequencing software) and the internal XG tone generator.
available XG song data and convert the The internal tone generator section of the EL-900 is normally set to EL Mode
data created by the EL-900 to the XG
for playing as an ﾒElectone.ﾓ
compatible data. See page 101 for more
information. Sending an appropriate system exclusive message from the sequencing software
(PC) to the EL-900 changes the mode to XG Mode, in which you can use the
Electone as an XG tone generator.
NOTE:
1
When you create an XG song data using a Send the XG System On message, ﾒF0, 43, 1N, 4C, 00, 00, 7E, 00, F7ﾓ
sequencing software, be sure to insert the (Hexadecimal), from the sequencing software (PC) to the EL-900.
XG System On message at the beginning
of the data. The internal tone generator
* N: Device Number
mode automatically changes to XG when
you start to play back the data. Once the XG System On message is received, the internal tone
generator will be in the XG Mode allowing the EL-900 to all the MIDI
NOTE: messages defined by the XG format such as NRPN and Bank Select.
The internal tone generator mode

automatically changes to XG when you
play back commercially available XG song
data.
Appendix
14
166
MIDI Data Format
1. Channel Messages
1.1 EL Mode
Code (Hexadecimal) Function Transmit Receive Remarks
8n,nn,00-7F Note Off ™ 1ch UK
™ 2ch LK
™ 3ch PK
™ (4ch)* LEAD 1
™ 5-14ch XG
™ 15ch Keyboard Percussion
9n,nn,00 Note Off (1ch)* 1ch UK
9n,nn,01-7F Note On (2ch)* 2ch LK
(3ch)* 3ch PK
™ (4ch)* LEAD 1
™ 5-14ch XG
™ 15ch Keyboard Percussion
Bn,00,00-7F Bank select ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,20,00-7F
Bn,01,00-7F Modulation ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,04,00-7F 2nd Expression 16ch 16ch Control
(4ch)** (4ch)* LEAD 1
Bn,05,00-7F Portamento Time ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,06,00-7F Data Entry ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,26,00-7F
Bn,07,00-7F Volume ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,0A,00-7F Pan ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,0B,00-7F Expression 16ch 16ch Control
5-14ch XG
Bn,10,00-7F After Touch for VA Voices (1ch)* 1ch UK
Bn,40,00-7F Hold ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,41,00-7F Portamento ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,42,00-7F Sostenuto ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,43,00-7F Soft Pedal ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,47,00-7F Resonance ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,48,00-7F Release Time ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,49,00-7F Attack Time ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,4A,00-7F Brightness ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,54,00-7F Portamento Control ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,5B,00-7F Reverb Send Level ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,5D,00-7F Chorus Send Level ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,5E,00-7F Variation Send Level ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,60,00-7F Data Increment ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,61,00-7F Data Decrement
Bn,62,00-7F NRPN LSB ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,63,00-7F NRPN MSB
Bn,64,00-7F RPN LSB ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,65,00-7F RPN MSB
Bn,78,00 All Sounds Off ™ 5-14ch XG
Bn,79,00 Reset All Controllers
Bn,7B,00 All Note Off
Bn,7C,00 Omni Off
Bn,7D,00 Omni On
Bn,7E,00 Mono
Appendix
Bn,7F,00 Poly
ﾒ™ﾓ indicates ﾒNot available.ﾓ
14
167
Cn,nn Program Change ™ 1ch UK
™ 2ch LK
™ 3ch PK
™ 5-14ch XG
16ch 16ch Control
Dn,00-7F After Touch (1ch)* 1ch UK
(2ch)* 2ch LK
(3ch)* 3ch PK
(4ch)* LEAD 1
En,00-7F,00-7F Pitch Bend (1ch)* 1ch UK
(2ch)* 2ch LK
(4ch)* LEAD 1
™ 5-14ch XG
* Can be changed in the MIDI settings.
** Can be output when assigned to the channel 4.
1.2 XG Mode
8n,nn,00-7F Note Off ™ 1-16ch
9n,nn,00 Note Off (1ch) UK
9n,nn,01-7F Note On (2ch)* LK
(3ch)* PK
1-16ch
Bn,00,00-7F Bank select ™ 1-16ch
Bn,20,00-7F
Bn,01,00-7F Modulation ™ 1-16ch
Bn,04,00-7F 2nd Expression 16ch ™ Control
(4ch)** LEAD 1
Bn,05,00-7F Portamento Time ™ 1-16ch
Bn,06,00-7F Data Entry ™ 1-16ch
Bn,26,00-7F
Bn,07,00-7F Volume ™ 1-16ch
Bn,0A,00-7F Pan ™ 1-16ch
Bn,0B,00-7F Expression 16ch 1-16ch Control
Bn,10,00-7F After Touch for VA Voices (1ch)* ™ UK
Bn,40,00-7F Hold ™ 1-16ch
Bn,41,00-7F Portamento ™ 1-16ch
Bn,42,00-7F Sostenuto ™ 1-16ch
Bn,43,00-7F Soft Pedal ™ 1-16ch
Bn,47,00-7F Resonance ™ 1-16ch
Bn,48,00-7F Release Time ™ 1-16ch
Bn,49,00-7F Attack Time ™ 1-16ch
Bn,4A,00-7F Brightness ™ 1-16ch
Bn,54,00-7F Portamento Control ™ 1-16ch
Bn,5B,00-7F Reverb Send Level ™ 1-16ch
Bn,5D,00-7F Chorus Send Level ™ 1-16ch
Bn,5E,00-7F Variation Send Level ™ 1-16ch
Bn,60,00-7F Data Increment ™ 1-16ch
Bn,61,00-7F Data Decrement
Bn,62,00-7F NRPN LSB ™ 1-16ch
Bn,63,00-7F NRPN MSB
Bn,64,00-7F RPN LSB ™ 1-16ch
Bn,65,00-7F RPN MSB
Appendix
14
168
Bn,78,00 All Sounds Off ™ 1-16ch
Bn,79,00 Reset All Controllers
Bn,7B,00 All Note Off
Bn,7C,00 Omni Off
Bn,7D,00 Omni On
Bn,7E,00 Mono
Bn,7F,00 Poly
Cn,00-7F Program Change 16ch Control
1-16ch
Dn,00-7F After Touch (1ch)* UK
(2ch)* LK
(3ch)* PK
1-16ch
En,00-7F,00-7F Pitch Bend (1ch)* UK
(2ch)* LK
™ 1-16ch
* Can be changed in the MIDI settings.
** Can be output when assigned to the channel 4.
2. Realtime Messages
F8 Clock ｯｯ*
FA Start ｯｯ
FC Stop ｯｯ
FE Active Sensing ｯｯ
FF Reset ™ ™
* Received only when in the Ext. mode ﾒｯﾓ indicates ﾒAvailable.ﾓ
3. System Exclusive Messages

3.1 Format
Universal Realtime Messages
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Transmit Receive
F0,7F,7F,04,01,SS,TT,F7 XG Master Volume ™ ｯ
XN
Universal Non-Realtime Messages

F0,7E,7F,09,01,F7 GM ON ™ ｯ
XN
XG Native
F0,43,1N,4C,AH,AM,AL,..data..,F7 XG Parameter Change ™ ｯ
F0,43,0N,4C,BH,BL,AH,AM,AL,..data..,cc,F7 XG Bulk Dump ™ ｯ
F0,43,1N,27,30,00,00,MM,LL,cc,F7 XG Master Tuning ™ ｯ
F0,43,1N,4C,00,00,7E,00,F7 XG System On ™ ｯ
Electone/Single Keyboard Common Messages

F0,43,73,01,02,F7 Request for Internal Synch. Mode ™ ｯ
03 Request for External Synch. Mode ™ ｯ
Appendix
14
169
Electone Exclusive
F0,43,70,70,00,...(Data)...F7 Bulk Dump Data ™ ｯ
78 ｯｯ
ID ™ ｯ
F0,43,70,ID,00,F7 Model ID Data ｯ ™
F0,43,70,70,nn(*1),F7 Request-to-Send Data ™ ｯ
78 ™ ｯ
ID ™ ｯ
F0,43,70,70,nn(*2),F7 Request-to-Receive Data ™ ｯ
78 ™ ｯ
ID ™ ｯ
F0,43,70,70,01,ID1,ID2,SPl,SPh,DCl,DCh,F7 Request-to-Send Voice parameter data ™ ｯ
78 ™ ｯ
ID ™ ｯ
F0,43,70,70,02,ID1,ID2,SPl,SPh,DCl,DCh,F7 Request-to-Receive Voice parameter data ™ ｯ
78 ™ ｯ
ID ™ ｯ
F0,43,70,70,30,F7 Request-to-Send Model ID data ™ ｯ
F0,43,70,70,38,7F,F7 Bulk Dump Acknowledge ｯ ™
00 Bulk Dump Unacknowledge ｯ ™
F0,43,70,70,40,nn(*3),7F,F7 Switch On ｯｯ
00 Switch Off ｯｯ
F0,43,70,70,40,50,TL,TH,F7 Tempo ｯｯ
F0,43,70,78,41,cd,dd,F7(*4) Panel Switch Events ｯｯ
F0,43,70,78,42,...(Data)...F7 Current Registration Data ｯｯ
F0,43,70,78,44...(Data)...(*5),F7 EL MIDI Parameters ｯｯ
F0,43,70,70,70,nn(*6),F7 External MDR ™ ｯ
F0,43,70,70,73,F7 EL ON ™ ｯ
F0,43,70,70,78,SC,NC,F7 Bar Signal ｯｯ
X : don't care N : Device Number(“0” on EL-900) ID=46
*1 Data Codes to Send

nn Data
10 All RAM
11 Registrations
12 Rhythm Sequences
14,15 User Patterns
16 User Voices
17 Keyboard Percussion Assignments
*2 Data Codes to Receive

nn Data
20 All RAM
21 Registrations
22 Rhythm Sequences
24,25 User Patterns
26 User Voices
27 Keyboard Percussion Assignments
*3 Switches
nn Switch Transmit R e c e i v e
45 Left Footswitch ｯｯ
Appendix
47 Knee Lever ｯｯ
48 Fill In 1 ｯｯ
4B Intro./Ending ｯｯ
4D Solo Bar ｯｯ
14
170
*4 Switch Codes
Selectors
Code Switch Transmit Tx Range R e c e i v e Rx Range R e m a r k s
02 UK Voice 1 ｯ [00-0D] ｯ [00-0D] Switch Number
03 LK Voice 1 ｯ [00-0D] ｯ [00-0D] Switch Number
04 UK Voice 2 ｯ [00-0D] ｯ [00-0D] Switch Number
05 LK Voice 2 ｯ [00-0D] ｯ [00-0D] Switch Number
06 LEAD Voice 1 ｯ [00-04] ｯ [00-04] Switch Number
07 Pedal Voice 1 ｯ [00-04] ｯ [00-04] Switch Number
08 Pedal Voice 2 ｯ [00-04] ｯ [00-04] Switch Number
09 LEAD Voice 2 ｯ [00,05-08] ｯ [00-08] Switch Number
0B Rhythm ｯ [00-0B] ｯ [00-04] Switch Number
0F Registration Memory ™ ｯ [00-0F]
Volume
12 UK Voice 1 ｯ [00-7F] ｯ [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX,7F:MIN
13 LK Voice 1 ｯ [00-7F] ｯ [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN
14 UK Voice 2 ｯ [00-7F] ｯ [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN
15 LK Voice 2 ｯ [00-7F] ｯ [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN
16 LEAD Voice 1 ｯ [00-7F] ｯ [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN
17 Pedal Voice 1 ｯ [00-7F] ｯ [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN
18 Pedal Voice 2 ｯ [00-7F] ｯ [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN
19 LEAD Voice 2 ｯ [00-7F] ｯ [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN
1A Rhythm ｯ [00-7F] ｯ [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN
1B Reverb ｯ [00-7F] ｯ [00-7F] Depth Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN
Flute Voice
30 Upper Flute Voice ｯ [00-01] ｯ [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON
31 Lower Flute Voice ｯ [00-01] ｯ [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON
To Lower
36 LEAD Voice 1 ｯ [00-01] ｯ [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON
37 Pedal Voice 1 ｯ [00-01] ｯ [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON
38 Pedal Voice 2 ｯ [00-01] ｯ [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON
Solo Mode
39 LEAD Voice 2 Solo (Bar) ｯ [00-01] ｯ [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON
Brilliance
42 UK Voice 1 ｯ [00-06] ｯ [00-06] 00: Brilliant; 06: Mellow
43 LK Voice 1 ｯ [00-06] ｯ [00-06] 00: Brilliant; 06: Mellow
45 LK Voice 2 ｯ [00-06] ｯ [00-06] 00: Brilliant; 06: Mellow
46 LEAD Voice 1 ｯ [00-06] ｯ [00-06] 00: Brilliant; 06: Mellow
47 Pedal Voice 1 ｯ [00-06] ｯ [00-06] 00: Brilliant; 06: Mellow
49 LEAD Voice 2 ｯ [00-06] ｯ [00-06] 00: Brilliant; 06: Mellow
Appendix
14
171
Sustain
50 Upper Keyboard ｯ [00-01] ｯ [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON
51 Lower Keyboard ｯ [00-01] ｯ [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON
52 Pedalboard ｯ [00-01] ｯ [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON
Solo Bar
59 Solo Bar ™ [00-01] ｯ [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON
Keyboard Percussion
5B Lower Keyboard ｯ [00-01] ｯ [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON
5C Pedal Board ｯ [00-01] ｯ [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON
Disable
5F Disable ｯ [00-01] ｯ [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON
Tremolo
60 Tremolo ｯ [00-01] ｯ [00-01] 00:SLOW,01:FAST
Rhythm Sequence
61 Sequence 1 ｯ [00-01] ｯ [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON
Appendix
14
172
*5 EL MIDI Parameters
Voice Section Parameters
Panel Voice Parameters
Address Size Data Parameter Content Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Remarks
00 00-07 00-0D 2 00-7F Voice Assign Number H fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
00-7F Voice Assign Number L fl [00-0F] fl [00-7F]

00 00-07 10 1 00-0D Voice Selector Number [00-0D] fl [00-0D]
00 00-07 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
7F:MAX
00 00-07 12 1 00-7F Reverb Send Level 00:MIN fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
7F:MAX
00 00-07 13 1 00-7F Brilliance 00:Brilliant [00] fl [00-0A]

[15] [0B-1F]
[2B] [20-35]
40:Center [40] [36-4A]

[55] [4B-5F]
[6B] [60-75]
7F:Mellow [7F] [76-7F]

00 00-07 14 1 00-04 Feet 00:Preset fl [00] fl [00][05-7F]
01:16Feet [01] [01]
02:8Fee [02] [02]
03:4Feet [03] [03]
04:2Feet [04] [04]
00 00-07 15 1 00-7F Pan 00:Right fl [0B] fl [00-11]
[1D] [12-25]
[2B] [26-31]
40:Center [40] [32-4E]
[55] [4F-5A]
[63] [5B-6E]
7F:Left [75] [6F-7F]
00 00-07 16 1 00-7F Initial Touch Sensitivity 00: Min. fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
7F: Max.
00 00-07 17 1 00-7F After Touch Sensitivity 00: Min. fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
7F: Max.
00 00-07 19 1 00-01 User Vibrato 00:PRESET fl [00] fl [00]
01:USER [01] [01-7F]
00 00-07 1A 1 02-1A Vibrato Delay 00:Short fl [02-1A] fl [00-7F]
7F:Long
00 00-07 1B 1 00-54 Vibrato Depth 00: Min. fl [00-54] fl [00-7F]
7F: Max.
00 00-07 1C 1 3C-6C Vibrato Speed 00:Slow fl [3C-6C] fl [00-7F]
7F:Fast
00 00-07 1D 1 00-7F Pitch (Horizontal) 00: Narrow fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
7F: Wide
00 00-07 1E 1 00-7F Touch Vibrato On/Off 00:OFF fl [00] fl [00]
01:ON [7F] [01-7F]
00 00-07 1F 1 00-01 To Lower 00:OFF [00] fl [00]
01:ON [01] [01-7F]
00 00-07 20 1 00-02 Slide 00:OFF fl [00] fl [00]
01:ON [01] [01]
00 00-07 21 1 02-7F Slide Speed 02:KneeControl fl [02] fl [02]
02:Slow [02-7F] [00-7F]
7F:Fast
00 00-07 22 1 00-24 Detune 00:Normal fl [00-24] fl [00-7F]
24:TuneUP
00 00-07 23 1 00-01 2nd Expression Pedal 00:OFF fl [00] fl [00]

Appendix
01:ON [01] [01-7F]
00 00-07 24 1 00-01 Glide 00:OFF fl [00] fl [00]
01:ON [01] [01-7F]
14
173
Flute Voice Parameters
01 00-01 00 1 00-7F FLUTE 16Feet 00:MIN fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
7F:MAX
7F:MAX
01 00-01 02 1 00-7F FLUTE 5-1/3Feet 00:MIN fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
7F:MAX
7F:MAX
7F:MAX
7F:MAX
7F:MAX
7F:MAX
01 00-01 09 1 00-7F FLUTE Response 00:Slow fl [43-7F] fl [00-7F]
06:Fast
01 00-01 0A 1 00-7F ATTACK 4Feet 00:MIN fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
7F:MAX
01 00-01 0B 1 00-7F ATTACK 2-2/3Feet 00:MIN fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
7F:MAX
01 00-01 0C 1 00-7F ATTACK 2Feet 00:MIN fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
7F:MAX
01 00-01 0D 1 00-7F ATTACK Length 00:Short fl [30-48] fl [00-7F]
06:Long
01 00-01 0E 1 00-7F Click 00:MIN fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
7F:MAX
01 00-01 11 1 00-7F Flute Coupler On/Off 00:OFF [00] fl [00]
01:ON [01] [01-7F]
01 00-01 12 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
7F:MAX
01 00-01 13 1 00-7F Reverb Send Level 00:MIN fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
7F:MAX
01 00-01 20 1 00-07 Parameter Load 00-07:PresetParameter fl [00-07] fl [00-07]
40-47 40-47:UserParameter [40-47] [40-47]
01 00-01 21 1 40-47 Parameter Save 40-47:UserParameter fl [40-47] fl [40-47]
Effect Parameters (Voice Sections)

00-01 00-07 3F 1 00-05 Effect Select 00:Preset fl [00] fl [00][07-7F]
01:OFF [01] [01]
02:Tremolo [02] [02]

03:Symphonic [03] [03]
04:Delay [04] [04]

05:Flanger [05] [05]
06:Distortion [06] [06]

00-01 00-07 40-42 1 00-7F Reverb [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
00-01 00-07 48-4A 1 00-7F Tremolo [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
00-01 00-07 50 1 00-7F Symphonic fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
00-01 00-07 58-5B 1,2 00-7F Delay fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]

Appendix
00-01 00-07 60-62 1 00-7F Flanger fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
00-01 00-07 68-69 1 00-7F Distortion fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
14
174
Keyboard Parameters
Sustain Parameters
02 00-02 00 1 00-01 Sustain On/Off 00:OFF [00] fl [00]
01:ON [01] [01-7F]
02 00-02 01 1 00-0C Length 00:Short fl [15-3D] fl [00-7F]
0C:Long
Keyboard Percussion Parameters

02 01-02 10 1 00-01 Keyboard Percussion 00:OFF [00] fl [00]
01:ON [01] [01-7F]
02 01-02 11 1 00-08 Modes 00:Preset fl [00] fl [00]
01-08:UserAssign1-8 [01-08] [01-08]
Effect Parameters (Keyboard)

02 00-02 40-42 1 Reverb [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
02 00-02 48-4A 1 Tremolo [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
02 00-02 50 1 Symphonic [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
02 00-02 58-5B 1,2 Delay [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
02 00-02 60-62 1 Flanger [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
02 00-02 68-69 1 Distortion [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
Rhythm
Rhythm Parameters
03 00 00-0B 1 00-65 Pattern Assign Number Pattern Numbers fl [00-62] fl [00-62]
67-98
03 00 10 1 00-0B Pattern Select Number Selector Switch Numbers [00-0B] fl [00-0B]
03 00 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
7F:MAX
03 00 12 1 00-7F Reverb Send Level 00:MIN fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
7F:MAX
03 00 14 1 00-01 Auto Variation 00:OFF fl [00] fl [00]
01:ON [01] [01-7F]
03 00 15 1 00-7F Rhythm Balance 00:Cymbal fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
40:Center
7F:Drums
03 00 16 1 00-01 2nd Expression 00:OFF fl [00] fl [00]
Tempo Control 01:ON [01] [01-7F]
03 00 17 1 00-03 Footswitch Rhythm Mode 00:OFF fl [00] [00][04-7F]

01:RhythmStop [01] fl [01]
02:Ending [02] [02]
03:FillIn [03] [03]
Rhythm Sequence Parameters

03 01 00-03 1 00-01 Rhythm Sequence 00:OFF [00] fl [00]

01:ON [01] [01-7F]
Appendix
14
175
Accompaniment Parameters
03 02 10 1 00-03 Pattern Selector Number 00:Type1 fl [00] fl [00]

01:Type2 [01] [01]
02:Type3 [02] [02]

03:Type4 [03] [03]
03 02 11 1 00-01 Volume Mute 00:OFF fl [00] fl [00]
01:MUTE [01] [01-7F]
03 02 12 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]

7F:MAX
03 02 13 1 00-7F Reverb Send Level 00:MIN fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
7F:MAX
A.B.C. Parameters
03 03 00 1 00-03 A.B.C. Mode 00:OFF fl [00] fl [00][04-7F]

01:SingleFinger [01] [01]
02:Fingerd [02] [02]
03:CustomABC [03] [03]
03 03 01 1 00-01 Lower Memory 00:OFF fl [00] fl [00]
01:ON [01] [01-7F]
03 03 02 1 00-01 Pedal Memory 00:OFF fl [00] fl [00]
01:ON [01] [01-7F]
M.O.C. Parameters
03 04 00 1 00-03 M.O.C. Mode 00:OFF fl [00] fl [00][04-7F]

01:Close2Note [01] [01]
02:Close3Note [02] [02]
03:PassBOpen [03] [03]
03 04 01 1 00-01 M.O.C. Knee Cntrol 00:OFF fl [00] fl [00]
01:ON [01] [01-7F]
Appendix
14
176
Overall
System Parameters
04 00 00 1 00-01 Disable 00:OFF [00] fl [00]

01:ON [01] [01-7F]
04 00 01 1 00-01 Flute Coupler Attack Mode 00:EachKey fl [00] fl [00]
01:FirstNewKey [01] [01-7F]

04 00 02 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown fl [3A] fl [3A]
40:Normal [40] [40]
46:KeyUp [46] [46]

04 00 03 1 00-0B 2nd Expression Range 01:100 ¢ fl [01-0C] fl [01-0C]
0C:1200 ¢
04 00 04 1 00-03 Footswitch Mode 00:OFF fl [00] fl [00][04-7F]

01:Rhythm [01] [01]
02:Glide [02] [02]
03:Tremolo [03] [03]
04 00 05 1 3C-4F Pitch 3C:PitchDown fl [3C-4F] fl [3C-4F]
40:Normal
4F:PitchUp
04 00 06 1 00-04 Glide Speed 01:Slow fl [04-1C] fl [00-7F]
05:Fast
04 00 07 1 34-4C Manual Balance 34:Upper fl [34-4C] fl [00-7F]
40:Center
4C:Lower
04 00 09 1 00-01 L.I.T. 00:Mode1 fl [00] fl [00]
01:Mode2 [01] [01]
04 00 0A 1 00-01 Expression INT/EXT 00:Internal [00] fl [00][02-7F]
01:External [01] [01]
Effect Parameters (Overall)

04 00 40-42 1 Reverb fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]

04 00 48-4A 1 Tremolo fl [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
04 00 50 1 Symphonic [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
04 00 58-5B 1,2 Delay [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
04 00 60-62 1 Flanger [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
04 00 68-69 1 Distortion [00-7F] fl [00-7F]
*6 External MDR
nn Command Transmit R e c e i v e
01 Play Start ™ ｯ
02 Play Stop ™ ｯ
03 Record Start ™ ｯ
04 Record Stop ™ ｯ
09 Rhythm Pointer Reset ™ ｯ
12 Next Bulk Read ｯ ™
Appendix
14
177
MIDI Inplementation Chart
Date:14. Jan.1998
YAMAHA [Electone-EL mode] / Model: EL-900 Version: 1.00
Function Transmit Receive Remarks
Basic Channel Default 1, 2, 3, 116 * *2

1-3, 5-16
Changed 1-16 4
Mode Default Mode 3 Mode 3

Messages
Altered ************************
Note Number 36-96*3 0-127*4

True Voice ************************
Velocity Note ON fl 9nH, v=1-127 fl 9nH, v=1-127

Note OFF fl 9nH, v=0 fl 9nH, v=0, 8nH
After Touch Key's

Ch's fl fl
Pitch Bend fl *5 fl *5
Control Change 0, 32 fl *6 Bank Select

1, 5, 7, 10 fl *6
4 fl *7 fl *7 2nd Expression Pedal
6, 38 fl *6 Data Entry
11 fl *7 fl *6, 7 Expression Pedal
16 fl *8 fl *8 VA After Touch
96, 97 fl *6 Data Entry SW
64-67 fl *6
71-74 fl *6 Sound Controller
84, 91, 93, 94 fl *6
98-99, 100-101 fl *6 NRPN, RPN
120, 121 fl *6
Program Change fl *10 fl *11

Range ************************
System Exclusive fl fl
System Song Position

Common Song Select
Tune
System Clock fl fl *9
Real Time Commands fl fl (FAH, FCH)
Aux Local ON/OFF

Messages All Notes OFF *11
fl (123-127)
Active Sense fl fl
Reset
*1 Ch 1: UK; Ch 2: LK; Ch 3: PK; Ch 16: Control
Ch 1: UK; Ch 2: LK; Ch 3: PK; Ch 4: LEAD 1; Chs 5 - 14: XG; Ch 15: Keyboard
Notes *2
*3 UK: 48 - 96; LK: 36 - 84; PK: 36 - 55
*4 UK, LK, PK, LEAD 1: 36 - 96; XG: 0 - 127; Keyboard Percussion: 3 - 127
*5 UK: UK Horizontal Touch; LK: LK Horizontal Touch
Appendix
*6 XG only
*7 Control only
*8 UK only
*9 External Mode only
*10 Control: 0 - 15, 112 - 116
*11 UK, LK, PK, Control: 0 - 15, 112 - 116; XG: 0 - 127
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO fl : YES

14 Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO : NO
178
Date:14. Jan.1998
YAMAHA [Electone-XG mode] / Model: EL-900 Version: 1.00
Function Transmit *12 Receive Remarks
Basic Channel Default 1, 2, 3, 16 1-16

Changed 1-16 1-16
Mode Default Mode3 Mode 3

Messages
Altered ************************
Note Number 36-96 0-127

True Voice ************************
Velocity Note ON fl 9nH, v=1-127 fl 9nH, v=1-127

Note OFF fl 9nH, v=0 fl 9nH, v=0, 8nH
After Touch Key's

Ch's fl fl
Pitch Bend fl fl
Control Change 0, 32 fl Bank Select

1, 5, 7, 10 fl
4 fl 2nd Expression Pedal
6, 38 fl Data Entry
11 fl fl Expression Pedal
16 fl VA After Touch
96, 97 fl Data Entry SW
64-67 fl
71-74 fl Sound Controller
84, 91, 93, 94 fl
98-99, 100-101 fl NRPN, RPN
120, 121 fl
fl
Program Change , 112-116

fl 0-15 fl
Range ************************
System Exclusive fl fl
System Song Position

Common Song Select
Tune
System Clock fl
Real Time Commands fl
Aux Local ON/OFF

Messages All Notes OFF fl (123-127)
Active Sense fl fl
Reset
*12 The same as the one in the EL Mode
Notes
Appendix
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO fl : YES

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO : NO
14
179
Memo
Appendix
14
180
Troubleshooting
Please note that the appearance of any of following phenomena does not indicate a mechanical failure
of the Electone.
Problem Possible Cause and Solution

GENERAL OPERATION
Some of the LEDs in the DISPLAY SELECT section The LEDs of on/off buttons (UPPER/LOWER FLUTE VOICES, VOICE EDIT,
do not light. RHYTHM PROGRAM, and TREMOLO [FAST]) are lit when those functions
are turned on. The LEDs of other functionﾕs buttons momentarily flash when
the functions are selected.
A cracking noise is sometimes heard. Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or off,
or an electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the Electone.
If this occurs, plug the Electone into an electrical outlet located as far as possible
from the device that seems to be the source of the problem.
Interference from radio, TV, or other sources This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station an amateur
occurs. ham radio setup or a mobile phone.
The sound of the Electone causes surrounding Because the Electone is capable of producing powerful bass sounds, resonance
objects to resonate. may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass windows. To
avoid this, relocate the objects or lower the Electoneﾕs volume.
The Electone panel does not function normally or This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to
the content of the memorized data has changed. electrical storms or other reasons may cause the Electone to malfunction and/
or alter the contents of memorized data. If this happens, perform the Power
On Reset operation to reset the Electone. (page 85)
The sound is too small even when the volume is ･ The Master Volume may be set around the minimum position. Turn it
set to its maximum. clockwise.
･ The Expression Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it down with your
toe.
Pressing a certain panel button doesnﾕt open its The HOLD button may be engaged. Press the HOLD button to cancel the
related LCD display. Hold function and press the button again.
VOICES/RHYTHMS
When selecting a dotted button voice or rhythm, The currently assigned voice or rhythm is displayed at the top of the LCD, and
the voice or rhythm title at the top of the LCD remains until another voice or rhythm has been selected.
does not match the voices or rhythms.
When too many keys are pressed, not all of the Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower
notes sound. Keyboards) is 14 notes. Polyphonic capacity is 12 for both the Upper and
Lower Flute Voices, and 6 each for the Upper and Lower Attack sound.
When playing a Pedal voice from the Lower Even though the Pedal voice is being played from the Lower keyboard, it is
keyboard (using the To Lower function), pressing still a Pedal voice; turn the Sustain on with the Pedal Sustain button.
the Lower keyboardﾕs Sustain button does not turn
on Sustain.
The sound is too soft, despite the volume being Check all of the volume controls, making sure that they are set to suitable
set to the maximum. levels: the panel Volume controls for each voice section, the Master Volume
dial, and the Expression Pedal.
Also check the Upper/Lower Balance control on the Voice Display. (page 28)
Switching voices causes the volume to change, The volume of certain voices may seem lower than that of others. Adjust the
despite their having identical volume settings. balance of the sound with the Volume control within the appropriate Voice
Condition display.
Appendix
When keys on the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard The keyboard Percussion function has been turned on. When not using the
are pressed, the sounds of percussion instruments function, be sure to turn it off. (page 71)
are also heard.
14
181
VOICES/RHYTHMS
Only one sound is heard when two notes of the For practical performance reasons, the Electone has been designed so that one
Lead or Pedal voices are simultaneously played. note of the Lead or Pedal voices can be played at a time. If several keys are
pressed at once, only the highest note will be sounded (highest-note priority).
The Pedal voices do not sound, even though the ･ The Single Finger or Fingered Chord mode of Auto Bass Chord is on. Turn
volume is properly set. off the mode in the display. (page 68)
･ TO LOWER buttons in the Pedal voice sections are turned on. Turn the
function off.
The pitch may be felt high on the Pedalboard and This may occur when you compare the Electoneﾕs sounds with the one of
low in the higher registers of the Lower and Upper pianos. Because of the difference of the harmonics structure, the tuning system
keyboards. of the Electone is different from the pianoﾕs in the higher and lower ranges.
Some of the voices may contain cracking and/or You may find these mainly in the wind instrument voices. These are purposely
noisy sounds. added effects to the voices to reproduce the characteristics of the wind
instruments such as the pipe vibrations, breath noises and squeakings.
Even though a Dotted buttonﾕs rhythm has been Since the Dotted buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a
selected and started, the pattern does not sound. pattern has not been saved to the selected Dotted button.
EFFECTS
The Touch Tone function does not operate. Adjust the Touch Tone settings in the Voice Condition display.
The Tremolo effect cannot be heard, even when Tremolo must be selected first in the Voice Condition display (for panel voices),
the TREMOLO (FAST) button in the DISPLAY or in the Flute Voices Volume page (for Flute Voices).
SELECT section is on.
The Reverb effect does not operate, even when Increase the Reverb on the panel Reverb controls, or increase the Reverb Depth
Reverb parameters for the selected voice sections in Reverb Page 1.
are increased.
ACCOMPANIMENT
The pitch in the Single Finger mode does not Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a fixed octave
change, even when pressing different keys of the interval on the Lower keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed
keyboard. outside of that range, the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch.
While an intro./Ending pattern is automatically Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the
playing, the Lower keyboard does not produce any Lower keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of
sound, even when the keys are played. an Intro./Ending pattern.
The Accompaniment cannot be heard even when The Accompaniment volume is set to 0 as the default. Be sure to raise the
an appropriate Accompaniment type is selected Accompaniment volume on the rhythm condition page.
and the rhythm has been started.
The harmony notes of the Melody On Chord The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead voices. Increase the
function cannot be heard. volume of the Upper Keyboard voices.
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Certain functions have not been memorized to Transposition and Pitch control data, among others, cannot be memorized
Registration Memory. (except as song data). (page 80)
Appendix
14
182
VOICE EDITING
During voice editing, the specified voice isnﾕt The current settings keep the voice from sounding. Make sure that the volume
heard, even when the keyboard is played. of the voice is set to a suitable level, and adjust the various parameters in the
Voice Edit display until the voice can be heard.
Changing the Envelope Generator of the Carrier When you make a change in the Envelope Generator of the Carrier (how the
(FM Operator) causes a timing gap in timbre volume changes over time), do the similar change in the Envelope Generator
changes. of the Modulator (how the timbre changes over time).
RHYTHM PROGRAM
During use of the Rhythm Pattern Program, no If percussion sounds have been recorded to all 16 rhythm tracks, no
sound is produced even when you play a certain subsequently selected instruments can be heard or recorded. If necessary,
percussion sound. erase one of the tracks and play the sound.
MUSIC DISK RECORDER
Recording or playback cannot be performed. ･ Problems in recording or playback may be caused by improper operation of
the M.D.R. Refer to the LED Display Messages chart on page 109.
･ The PLAY or RECORD section buttons for selecting parts may be turned
off. Turn on the appropriate PLAY or RECORD buttons.
A total of 40 songs cannot be recorded. If some song numbers contain a large amount of recorded data, the disk may
not have enough available memory left to record the normal maximum of 40
songs.
Recording is stopped before the performance is The amount of recorded data on the disk is close to the maximum limit. Either
finished, or the Song Copy function cannot be use another disk or delete the data of any unnecessary song number.
executed.
The rhythm does not start at the beginning of a The M.D.R. is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very
recording, or stops in the middle of the beginning of a recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the
performance. available memory display appears on the M.D.R. display.
The notes of the recording are ﾒstuckﾓ and sound During playback, you removed the disk by pressing the EJECT button.
continuously. Whenever you wish to stop playback, always press the STOP button.
Appendix
14
183
EL-900 Specifications
KEYBOARD Keyboards Upper: 49 keys (C – C), Lower: 49 keys (C – C), Pedal: 20 keys (C – G)
Touch Tone Initial, After (Upper, Lead, Lower, Pedal)
Pitch Horizontal Touch (Upper, Lead, Lower)
VOICE Tone Generation New AWM & FM, VA
Upper Keyboard Voice 1, 2 Strings 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,7, Pizz. Strings, Tremolo Strings, Synth. Strings 1, 2, 3; Brass 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Synth. Brass 1, 2, 3; Clarinet 1, 2, Bass
Lower Keyboard Voice 1, 2 Clarinet, Synth. Clarinet 1, 2; Saxophone 1, 2, Soprano Sax., Sax. Ensemble 1, 2, Synth. Sax, Synth. Lead 1, 2, 3, 4, 5; Chorus 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
Vocal; Organ 1, 2, 3, 4, Jazz Organ 1, 2, 3, 4, Pop Organ 1, 2, Theatre Organ 1, 2, Accordion, Bandoneon; Piano 1, 2, Honky Tonk, Elec.
Piano 1, 2, 3, Harpsichord, Clavi., Clavichord; Guitar 1, 2, 3, 12 String Guitar, Banjo, Mandolin, Sitar, Shamisen, Elec. Guitar 1, 2, Muted
Guitar, Distortion Guitar, Steel Guitar, Harp, Koto, Taisho Koto; Vibraphone, Glockenspiel, Celesta, Music Box, Marimba, Xylophone, Chime,
Synth. Chime, Steel Drum; Cosmic 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16; Tutti 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7; [Upper] Harmonica 1, 2; [Lower]
Horn 1, 2, 3, 4, Muted Horn; User 1-16; 2 Dotted Buttons; [Upper] 115 Voices; [Lower] 118 Voices; Volume Fine; Brilliance
Lead Voice 1 Violin 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Pizz. Violin, Cello, Kokyu; Flute 1, 2, Piccolo, Recorder, Yokobue, Ocarina, Pan Flute, Shakuhachi, Whistle; Oboe 1, 2,
English Horn, Bassoon 1, 2; Trumpet 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, Muted Trumpet, Trombone 1, 2, Muted Trombone, Flugel Horn, Euphonium; User 1-16;
To Lower; Dotted Button; 34 Voices; Volume Fine; Brilliance
Lead Voice 2 (VA) V-Flute, V-Oboe, V-Clarinet, V-Sopra. Sax., Alto Sax., Tenor Sax., Breath Sax., V-Trumpet, V-Trombone, V-Shakuhachi, V-Kokyu, V-Sitar; Pan
Pipe, Air Reed, Thin Reed, Grass Reed, Soft Reed, Buzz String, Bow Strings, Waspy Horn; Jazz Guitar, Picked Guitar, Saw Lead, Edge Lead,
Dist. Lead, Woody Lead, Muted Lead, Talken Lead; Custom 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6; User 1-16; SOLO (Knee) Button; Dotted Button; 34 Voices;
Volume Fine; Brilliance
Pedalboard Voice 1, 2 Contrabass 1, 2, 3, Pizz. Bass, Upright Bass; Elec. Bass 1, 2, 3, 4, Synth. Bass 1, 2, 3; Organ Bass 1, 2, 3, 4; Tuba, Timpani, Timpani Roll;
User 1-16; To Lower; Dotted Button; 19 Voices; Volume Fine; Brilliance
Voice Display Upper 1,2; Lower 1,2; Lead 1,2; Pedal 1,2; Manual Balance
Upper Flute Voice Flute Voices (16', 8', 51/3',4', 22/3', 2', 13/5', 1'); Attack (4', 22/3', 2'; Length; Mode: Each, First); Click; Response; Tremolo On/Off; Reverb;
Lower Flute Voice Volume; 8 Presets; 8 User Voices; On/Off Control: Upper, Lower
VOICE EDIT On/Off; Operator 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8:(Output Level, Attack Rate, Decay 1 Rate, Decay 1 Level, Decay 2 Rate, Release Rate); AWM: (Output
Level, Attack Rate, Decay Rate, Release Rate, Low, High); Operator Selectors; Operator On/Off Buttons; Save: User: 1 – 16; (From) Voice
Disk; Voice Name
EFFECT/CONDITION Digital Reverb 3 Types: Room, Hall, Church; Length; Depth; Volume: Upper/Lower 1, 2, Flute Voice, Lead 1, 2, Pedal 1, 2, Accompaniment, Percussion; Set:
Length, Depth
Sustain Upper (Knee), Lower (Knee), Pedal: Length
Brilliance Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Pedal1, 2: Control: Brilliant/Mellow
Tremolo/Chorus Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Pedal1, 2, Flute Voice; Tremolo (Fast): Speed; Chorus: Slow, Stop
Symphonic/Celeste Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Pedal1, 2; Mode: Symphonic/Celeste
Vibrato Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Pedal1, 2: Preset/User (Delay, Depth, Speed); Touch Vibrato
Delay Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Pedal1, 2; Control: Time, Feedback, Balance; Mode: Mono, Stereo 1, 2, 3
Flanger Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Pedal1, 2; Control: Speed, Feedback, Depth
Distortion Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Pedal1, 2; Control: Level, Hi-pass
Glide Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead 1, 2; Control: Time
Pitch Bend Upper 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Pedal1, 2; On/Off; Range: 1 - 12
Lead Slide On/Knee/Off; Control: Time
Lead Tune Tune Control
Panning Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Pedal1, 2; (7 positions)
Feet Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Pedal1, 2; Preset 2' (Pedal Voices only)/4'/8'/16'
RHYTHM Rhythms March 1, 2, 3, Polka 1, 2, Country 1, 2, Broadway, Baroque; Waltz 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Jazz Waltz 1, 2, 3, Bolero; Swing 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, Jazz Ballad,
Dixieland 1, 2; Bounce 1, 2, 3, Reggae 1, 2; Slow Rock 1, 2, 3; 8Beat 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Dance Pop 1, 2, 3, 4; Tango 1, 2, 3; Mambo, Salsa,
Chacha, Rhumba, Beguine; Samba 1, 2, 3, Bossanova 1, 2, 3; 16Beat 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 16 Beat Funk 1, 2, 3; User 1-8 (A-D); 2 Dotted Buttons; 66
Rhythms; Volume Fine
Variations Fill-In; Intro. Ending; Lead In; Auto Variation: On/Off
Others Start; Synchro Start; Tempo; Bar/Beat LED; Condition: Reverb, Balance, Volume; Instrument: Tune, Pan, Reverb, Volume; Assign: Normal,
Extend(ed), Copy Preset
3 3 3
RHYTHM PROGRAM Pattern Program On/Off; Step Write/Real Time Write; Beat (4/4, 3/4, 2/4); Quantize ( , , , , , , , Off); Metronome (On/Off); Assign
(Normal/Extend); Edit: Instruments 1-16 (Change, Clear; Cursor); Accent Level 0-8; 120 Instruments; Accompaniment Select; Lower Rhythmic
(Clear, Change, 16 Accompaniment Voices); Save: User 1-8 (A-D, Fill-In); (From) Pattern Disk; Pattern Name; Remaining Memory Display
Rhythm Sequence On/Off; Sequence 1-4; 120 Positions (Bar); Cursor Controls; Data: Preset/User (Set, Insert, Delete, Clear)
KEYBOARD PERCUSSION Lower, Pedal On/Off: Lower Preset, Pedal Preset, User 1- 8; Copy: LK Preset, PK Preset, User; Assign: 120 Instruments, Clear
Appendix
14
184
ACCOMPANIMENT Auto Bass Chord Mode: Off; Single Finger; Fingered Chord; Custom ABC; Memory: Lower, Pedal
Accompaniments Type 1, 2, 3, 4, All Off
MELODY ON CHORD Mode: Off, 1, 2, 3; Knee: On/Off
BASIC REGISTRATION 1–5
REGISTRATION MEMORY M./To Disk, 1-16; Disable Button; Mode: Off; Shift; Jump; User (80 Positions; Cursor Controls: Data: Set, Insert, Delete, Clear; Shift End:
Stop, Top, Next Song)
REGISTRATION MENU 80 (Provided in the Included Disk)
MUSIC DISK RECORDER Play/Record: Upper, Lower, Pedal, Lead, Keyboard Percussion, Control; Pause, Stop, Fast Forward/Reverse, Song Select, Shift, Custom Play,
Tempo; Format, Read & Auto Increment, Song Repeat; Song Delete; Song Copy: From/To; Disk Copy, Punch in Recording, XG Song
Playback, XG Easy Converter, Song Name, Voice Disk, Pattern Disk, Remaining Memory; LED Display; Eject
FOOT SWITCH [Left] Mode: Off; Rhythm (Stop, Ending, Fill-In); Glide (Upper/Lower/Lead 1, 2; Time); Tremolo (On/Off); [Right] Regist. Shift Mode: Off,
Shift, Jump, User
KNEE LEVER On/Off: Sustain (Upper, Lower); MOC; Lead Slide; Solo/Upper Mode
2ND EXP. PEDAL Pitch Bend (On/Off: Upper/LeadPedal 1, 2; Range 1 -12); Tempo (Range 1 -12)
TRANSPOSE/PITCH Transpose: -6 - +6; Pitch: 438.8Hz - 444.5Hz
LCD DISPLAY 480 x 160 Full Dot
OTHER CONTROLS Power On/Off; Exp. Pedal (Right/Left Footswitches); 2nd ExpressionPedal; Pitch Control; Transpose; Master Volume; Display Select; Data
Controls; Page; Coarse; Hold; LCD Contrast; MIDI (Output: Upper, Lower, Pedal; Int./Ext.: Lead, Sync., Exp.); Lead Initial Touch
OTHER FITTINGS Registration Menu Disk; 3.5" Floppy Disk; Matching Bench; Keyboard Cover/Music Stand; Headphone Jack; Rhythm In (Phone; R/L); Aux Out
(Phone; R/L); Aux In/Out (RCA; R/L); Mic In; Mic. Volume; Mic. Reverb; MIDI IN/Out; To Host; Host Select
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Voice Disk; Pattern Disk; HPE-170 Headphones; 3.5" Floppy Disks
SOUND SYSTEM Power Amplifiers 216W (Stereo)
Speakers 20cm x 2; 18cm x 2; 2.5cm x 2; Monitor 6.6cm x 2
DIMENSIONS Width x Depth x Height 114.9cm x 55.6cm x 98.0cm *With Keyboard Cover Closed
WEIGHT 105kg, Bench: 10kg
Specifications and description in this Owner's Manual are information purposes only.
Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice.
As specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with Yamaha dealer.
Appendix
14
185
Index
A D H
A.B.C. ........................................................ 68 D. (Disable) ......................................... 80, 86 HALL (REVERB) ........................................ 52
A.B.C./M.O.C ....................................... 68, 79 DATA CONTROL ....................................... 21 HEADPHONES ........................................ 160
ACC. (ACCOMPANIMENT) ....................... 70 DATA (REGIST SHIFT) .............................. 84 HIGH (AWM) ........................................... 120
ACCENT(LOWER RHYTHMIC) ................ 139 DATA (SEQUENCE) ................................ 147 HOLD ........................................................ 23
ACCENT(RHYTHM PROGRAM) .............. 134 DELAY ................................................. 47, 49 HOST SELECT ......................................... 160
ACC. (RHYTHM PROGRAM) ................... 137 DELAY (VIBRATO) .................................... 47
AFTER ....................................................... 45 DEL. (REGIST SHIFT) ................................ 84 I
ALG (ALGORITHM) ......................... 111, 119 DEL. (SEQUENCE) .................................. 147
INITIAL ...................................................... 45
AR (AWM) ............................................... 120 DEPTH (FLANGER) ................................... 51
INS. (REGIST SHIFT) ................................. 84
AR (FM) ................................................... 121 DEPTH (REVERB) ...................................... 52
INS. (SEQUENCE) ................................... 147
ASSIGN (INSTRUMENT) ........................... 63 DEPTH (VIBRATO) .................................... 47
INST. (KEYBOARD PERCUSSION) ........... 74
ASSIGN (KEYBOARD PERCUSSION) ....... 73 Disk Copy (MDR) .................................... 106
INSTRUMENT (RHYTHM) .......................... 63
ASSIGN (RHYTHM PROGRAM) .............. 131 DISPLAY SELECT ...................................... 28
INSTRUMENT (RHYTHM PROGRAM) ..... 132
ATTACK .................................................... 41 DIST. (DISTORTION) ................................. 51
INT./EXT. ................................................. 159
AUTO VARI. ............................................... 62 Dotted Button(S) ........................................ 30
INTRO. ENDING ........................................ 60
AUX IN/OUT ............................................ 160 Dotted Button(S) ........................................ 64
AWM ....................................................... 120 DR(AWM) ................................................ 120
J
D1L (FM) ................................................. 121
B D1R (FM) ................................................. 121 JUMP (REGIST SHIFT) .............................. 82
D2R (FM) ................................................. 121
BAL. (DELAY) ............................................ 50
K
BAL. (PERCUSSION) ................................. 62
BAR/BEAT ................................................. 61 E KEYBOARD PERCUSSION ....................... 71
BASIC REGIST. ......................................... 11 EACH (FLUTE VOICE) ............................... 41 KNEE ....................................................... 153
BEAT ....................................................... 131 EDIT (REGIST SHIFT) ................................ 84
BRIL. (BRILLIANCE) .................................. 47 EDIT (RHYTHM PROGRAM) ............ 132, 136 L
EDIT (VOICE EDIT) .................................. 110 LCD Display .............................................. 20
C EFFECT ..................................................... 46 Lead In ...................................................... 60
EFFECT SET .............................................. 48 LEAD VOICE ............................................. 26
CARRIER (VOICE EDIT) .......................... 119
ENDING .................................................... 60 LED Messages (MDR) ............................. 109
CELESTE ................................................... 49
Envelope Parameter (VOICE EDIT) ......... 122 LENG. (FLUTE VOICE) .............................. 41
CHANGE (RHYTHM PROGRAM) ............ 132
EXP. (EXPRESSION) .......................... 11, 155 LENG. (REVERB) ....................................... 52
Change Name (SONG NAME) .................. 92
EXP./PITCH/MIDI ...................... 155, 158, 159 LENGTH (SUSTAIN) .................................. 55
CHANGE VOICE (LOWER RHYTHMIC) ... 138
EXTEND(ED) Set ....................... 63, 129, 131 L. FLUTE VOICE ........................................ 40
CHOR. (CHORUS) .............................. 49, 58
CHURCH (REVERB) .................................. 52 L.I.T (Lead Initial Touch) .......................... 159
CLEAR (KEYBOARD PERCUSSION) ......... 74 F LK PRESET ................................................ 73
CLEAR (LOWER RHYTHMIC) .................. 138 Fast Forward/Reverse ............................. 102 LOW (AWM) ............................................ 120
CLEAR (REGIST SHIFT) ............................ 85 FB. (DELAY) .............................................. 50 LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE ...................... 26
CLEAR (RHYTHM PROGRAM) ........ 133, 136 FB. (FLANGER) ......................................... 51 LOWER RHYTHMIC ................................ 138
CLEAR (SEQUENCE) .............................. 147 Feed Back (VOICE EDIT) ....................... 122
CLICK ........................................................ 41 FEET .......................................................... 46 M
COARSE .................................................... 23 FILL IN ....................................................... 61 MDR .......................................................... 87
COMBINATION ......................................... 32 Fingered Chord ......................................... 68 MASTER VOLUME .................................... 11
CONTRAST ............................................... 23 FIRST (FLUTE VOICE) ............................... 41 MEM. (MEMORY) ...................................... 68
COPY/LK PRESET (KEYBOARD FLANG. (FLANGER) ............................ 47, 50 MENU (FLUTE VOICE) .............................. 43
PERCUSSION) .......................................... 77 FM ........................................................... 121 MENU (KEYBOARD PERCUSSION) .......... 73
COPY/PK PRESET (KEYBOARD FOOTAGE ................................................. 40
PERCUSSION) .......................................... 77 METRONOME ......................................... 131
FOOT SW ................................................ 151 MIC ......................................................... 160
COPY/PRESET (INSTRUMENT) ................. 63
FOOT SWITCH-LEFT ............................... 151 MIC.REV. ................................................. 160
COPY PROTECT ..................................... 108
FOOT SWITCH-RIGHT .............................. 82 MIC.VOL .................................................. 160
COPY/USER (KEYBOARD PERCUSSION) ... 77
FORMAT .................................................... 89 MIDI .......................................... 158, 160, 161
Custom A.B.C. ........................................... 68
CUSTOM PLAY ................................. 90, 102 M.O.C. (MELODY ON CHORD) ................. 79
G MODE (CHORUS) ..................................... 58
GLIDE CONTROL .................................... 152 MODE (DELAY) ......................................... 50
MODE (FLUTE VOICE) .............................. 41
Appendix
MODE (M.O.C) .......................................... 79

MODE (PITCH BEND, TEMPO) ............... 155
MODE (REGIST SHIFT) ............................. 82
MODE (SYMPHONIC) ............................... 49
Modulator (VOICE EDIT) .......................... 119
14
M./TO DISK ............................................... 80
MUTE (XG Song Playback) ..................... 100
Mute (PANEL VOICE) ................................ 28
186
N S V
NEXT SONG (SHIFT END) ......................... 83 SAVE (FLUTE VOICE) ................................ 42 VA ............................................................. 35
NORMAL Set ............................. 63, 128, 131 SAVE (RHYTHM PROGRAM) .................. 140 VIBRATO ................................................... 47
SAVE (VOICE EDIT) ................................. 115 Voice Condition ......................................... 45
O 2ND EXPRESSION .................................. 155 VOICE DISK ............................................ 118
SEQ. (SEQUENCE) ................................. 144 VOICE DISPLAY ........................................ 28
OL (AWM) ............................................... 120
SET (REGIST SHIFT) ................................. 84 VOIC EDIT ............................................... 110
OL (FM) ........................................... 121, 122
SET (REVERB) ........................................... 52 Voice Menu ............................................... 32
OPERATOR .............................. 111, 113, 119
SET (SEQUENCE) ................................... 147 Voice Name (VOICE EDIT) ...................... 116
OUTPUT (MIDI) ....................................... 158
SHIFT END ................................................ 83 Voice Sections ........................................... 26
SHIFT (MDR) ............................................. 89 VOL. (VOLUME; ACCOMPANIMENT) ....... 70
P
SHIFT (REGIST SHIFT) .............................. 82 VOL. (FLUTE VOICE) ................................. 41
PAGE ......................................................... 21 Single Finger ............................................. 68 VOL. (INSTRUMENT) ................................. 63
PAN ........................................................... 46 SLIDE ........................................................ 48 VOL. (PERCUSSION) ................................ 62
PAN (INSTRUMENT) ................................. 63 SLOW (CHORUS) ...................................... 58 VOL. (PANEL VOICE) .......................... 27, 46
PATTERN ................................................ 126 SOLO (KNEE) ............................................ 29 VOL. (XG Song) ...................................... 100
PATTERN DISK ....................................... 143 SOLO Mode .............................................. 29
Pattern Name (RHYTHM PROGRAM) ...... 141 SONDIUS-XG ................................................... 4 X
PAUSE ..................................................... 102 SONG COPY ........................................... 104
XG Easy Converter .................................. 101
PEDAL VOICE ........................................... 26 SONG DELETE ........................................ 106
XG Song Playback .................................. 100
PERCUSSION ............................................ 62 SONG NAME ............................................. 92
PITCH ...................................................... 157 SONG REPEAT .......................................... 99
PITCH (HORIZONTAL) .............................. 46 SONG SELECT .......................................... 90
PITCH BEND(2ND EXPRESSION) ........... 155 SPEED (FLANGER) ................................... 51
PK PRESET ............................................... 73 SPEED (TREMOLO) .................................. 58
PLAY ................................................... 90, 98 SPEED (VIBRATO) .................................... 47
PLAY PART (XG Song Playback) ............ 100 START ....................................................... 60
POSITION (REGIST SHIFT) ....................... 84 STEP WRITE .................................... 130, 132
POSITION (SEQUENCE) ......................... 147 STOP (CHORUS) ....................................... 58
POWER ..................................................... 10 STOP (MDR) ........................................ 91, 98
Power On Reset ........................................ 85 STOP (SHIFT END) .................................... 83
PRESET (EFFECT) ..................................... 46 SUSTAIN ................................................... 55
PRESET (FLUTE VOICE) ........................... 43 SYMP. (SYMPHONIC) ......................... 47, 49
PRESET (SEQUENCE) ............................. 145 SYNCHRO START ..................................... 60
PRESET (VIBRATO) ................................... 47
Punch In recording .................................... 95 T
TEMPO (MDR) ......................................... 103
Q
TEMPO (RHYTHM) .................................... 61
QUANTIZE ...................................... 131, 135 TEMPO (2ND EXPRESSION) ................... 156
TIME (DELAY) ........................................... 50
R TIME (GLIDE) .......................................... 152
Read and Auto Incremant ....................... 102 TIME (SLIDE) ............................................. 48
REAL TIME WRITE .......................... 130, 136 TO HOST ................................................. 160
RECORD ................................................... 90 TO LOWER ................................................ 28
Registration Menu Disk ............................. 12 TOP (SHIFT END) ...................................... 83
REGIST SHIFT ........................................... 82 TOUCH TONE ........................................... 45
Remaining Memory (MDR) ...................... 108 TOUCH VIB. .............................................. 48
Remaining Memory (RHYTHM PROGRAM) 140 TRANSPOSE ........................................... 157
RESP. (FLUTE VOICE) ............................... 41 TREMOLO. (FAST) .................................... 58
REV. (REVERB) ............................. 41, 46, 63 TREM. (TREMOLO) ....................... 46, 49, 58
REVERB .................................................... 52 TUNE ......................................................... 48
RHYTHM ................................................... 59 TUNE (INSTRUMENT) ............................... 63
Rhythm Condition ...................................... 62 TYPE (ACCOMPANIMENT) ....................... 70
RHYTHM CONTROL ............................... 152 TYPE (REVERB) ......................................... 52
RHYTHM IN ............................................. 160
Rhythm Menu ............................................ 66 U
RHYTHM PROGRAM ............................... 125 U. FLUTE VOICE ....................................... 40
ROOM (REVERB) ...................................... 52 UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE ....................... 26
RR (AWM) ............................................... 120 UPPER Mode ............................................. 29
RR (FM) ................................................... 121
Appendix
USER (FLUTE VOICE) ............................... 42

USER (KEYBOARD PERCUSSION) ........... 73
USER (REGIST SHIFT) .............................. 83
USER (RHYTHM) ............................... 65, 140
USER (SEQUENCE) ................................ 144
14
USER (VIBRATO) ...................................... 47
USER (PANEL VOICE) ....................... 30, 115
187

Yamaha Electone EL-900 Owner - S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Yamaha Electone EL-900 Owner - S Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Yamaha Electone EL-900 Owner - S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What safety markings and notices are mentioned?

What safety markings and notices are mentioned?

What does the manual say about service charges?

What does the manual say about service charges?

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

BATTERY NOTICE: This product MAY contain a small

DISPOSAL NOTICE: Should this product become

IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information Model

The Yamaha EL-900 Electone combines the most advanced AWM

we urge you to read the manual thoroughly while trying out

Panel Layout .............................................. 6 7 Music Disk Recorder ........................... 87

1 Quick Introductory Guide .................. 1 0

5 Recalling Recorded Registrations (and Bulk Data) .... 97

1 Rhythm Pattern Program .................................. 126

2) Pitch ............................................................... 46 4) Selecting Step Write or

[PAGE 2] ............................................................ 46 8) Editing with Real Time Write ..................... 136

5 Rhythm and Accompaniment ............ 5 9

11 Transpose And Pitch Controls ....... 157

2 Rhythm Condition Page ..................................... 62

6 Accompaniment Controls .................................. 70 14 Appendix ......................................... 161

6 Registration Memory ......................... 8 0

1 Storing Registrations ........................................... 80 Specifications ......................................................... 184

LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1, 2 UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1, 2

MIN MELLOW MIN MELLOW MIN

MELLOW MIN MELLOW MIN

PEDAL SEQ. SEQ. TANGO LATIN 1 LATIN 2 8 BEAT 16 BEAT 2 2

INTRO. SYNCHRO START

KEYBOARD PERCUSSION BASIC REGIST.

M./TO DISK Button Registration Memory Buttons

LEAD VOICE 1 BRILLIANCE VOLUME LEAD VOICE 2 BRILLIANCE VOLUME

FOOT REGIST. EXP. OBOE TRUM- TO VA VA SOLO

U. FLUTE L. FLUTE TREMOLO

COARSE HOLD ORGAN

Floppy Disk Slot

LED (Lamp in-use) Eject Button

U. FLUTE L. FLUTE TREMOLO

TREMOLO (FAST) Button (page 58)

COARSE Button (page 23)

MIDI Jacks (page 160)

Knee Lever (page 153)

Jacks (page 180) Right-Footswitch (page 82)

Second Expression Pedal (page155)

1 Astoundingly True-to-life Sounds

2 Limitless Variety of Organ Sounds

3 Original Voice Creation

4 Dynamic and Programmable Rhythm Patterns

5 Wide Variety of Effects

6 Versatile Functions of the Music Disk Recorder

7 Large LCD for Systematic, Intuitive Operation

1 Plug the power cord in to an appropriate electrical outlet.

Only use the voltage specified as correct

When the Electone is turned on, Basic Registration 1 is automatically

Quick Introductory Guide

4 Press the Expression pedal down with your foot.

Maximum volume Minimum volume

with a different set of voices for the Upper/Lower keyboards and

Basic Basic Basic Basic Basic

The Electone includes convenient Registrations that let you completely